Mondeo (2012) - Car FORD - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL Mondeo (2012) FORD

FORD MONDEO Owner's Manual

Front view of a Ford Honda car with a starry night sky background (no text or symbols on the cars or background)

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.

© Ford Motor Company 2013

All rights reserved.

Part Number: CG3536en 11/2013 20131129085350

Introduction

About This Manual....7

Symbols Glossary....7

Replacement Parts Recommendation......8

At a Glance

At a Glance....9

Child Safety

Child Seats....21

Booster Seats....22

Child Seat Positioning....23

ISOFIX Anchor Points....26

Child Safety Locks......27

Keys and Remote Controls

General Information on Radio Frequencies....29

Programming the remote control.....29

Changing the remote control battery....29

Locks

Locking and Unlocking....32

Keyless Entry....34

Global Opening and Closing......37

Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel....39

Audio Control....39

Wipers and Washers

Windshield Wipers....41

Autowipers....41

Windshield Washers....42

Rear Window Wiper and Washers......42

Headlamp Washers....42

Checking the Wiper Blades....43

Changing the Wiper Blades....43

Lighting

Lighting Control....45

Autolamps....46

Daytime Running Lamps....46

Automatic High Beam Control......46

Front Fog Lamps....48

Rear Fog Lamps....48

Headlamp Leveling....48

Adaptive Headlamps....49

Direction Indicators....50

Interior Lamps....51

Adjusting the Headlamps....53

Hazard Warning Flashers....53

Removing a Headlamp....53

Changing a Bulb....54

Bulb Specification Chart....60

Windows and Mirrors

Power Windows....62

Exterior Mirrors....64

Power exterior mirrors....64

Auto-Dimming Mirror....66

Blind Spot Information System......66

Instrument Cluster

Gauges....69

Warning Lamps and Indicators......71

Audible Warnings and Indicators......73

Information Displays

General Information....75

Trip Computer....84

Personalized Settings......86

Information Messages....88

Climate Control

Principle of Operation....98

Air Vents....98

Manual Climate Control....99

Automatic Climate Control....101

Heated Windows and Mirrors......103

Auxiliary Heater....104

Power moon roof....108

Seats

Sitting in the Correct Position....111

Head Restraints....111

Manual Seats....112

Power Seats....113

Rear Seats....115

Heated Seats....115

Ventilated Seats....116

Starting and Stopping the Engine

General Information......118

Ignition Switch....118

Keyless Starting....118

Steering Wheel Lock....120

Starting a Gasoline Engine....121

Starting a Gasoline Engine - E85......122

Starting a Diesel Engine....122

Diesel Particulate Filter....123

Switching Off the Engine....123

Engine Block Heater....123

Fuel and Refueling

Safety Precautions....125

Fuel Quality - Gasoline....125

Fuel Quality - E85....125

Fuel Quality - Diesel....125

Catalytic Converter....126

Refueling....126

Refueling - E85....126

Fuel Consumption......126

Fuel filler door....127

Technical Specifications....128

Transmission

Manual Transmission....133

Automatic Transmission....133

Brakes

Principle of Operation....136

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes....136

Parking Brake....136

Stability Control

Principle of Operation....137

Using Stability Control....137

Parking Aids

Principle of Operation....138

Parking Aid....138

Cruise Control

Principle of Operation....140

Using Cruise Control....140

Load Carrying

General Information....142

Luggage Anchor Points....142

Sliding Loadspace Floor....143

Rear Under Floor Storage....145

Cargo Nets....145

Luggage Covers....146

Roof Racks and Load Carriers.....147

Load Retaining Fixtures....147

Dog Guard....149

Towing

Towing a Trailer....151

Tow Ball....151

Driving Hints

Breaking-In....155

General Driving Points....155

Cold Weather Precautions....155

Driving Through Water....155

Roadside Emergencies

First Aid Kit....156

Warning Triangle....156

Fuses

Fuse Box Locations....157

Fuse Specification Chart....159

Changing a Fuse....168

Maintenance

General Information......169

Opening and Closing the Hood.....169

Under Hood Overview - 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)....171

Under Hood Overview - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)....172

Under Hood Overview - 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)....173

Under Hood Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)....174

Under Hood Overview - 2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)....175

Under Hood Overview - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel....176

Under Hood Overview - 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel....177

Under Hood Overview - 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel......179

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)....180

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)....180

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)......180

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)....180

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel/2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel....181

Engine Oil Check....181

Engine Coolant Check....181

Brake and Clutch Fluid Check....182

Power Steering Fluid Check....182

Washer Fluid Check....183

Technical Specifications....183

Vehicle Care

Cleaning the Exterior....186

Cleaning the Interior....187

Repairing Minor Paint Damage......187

Wheels and Tires

General Information....188

Temporary Mobility Kit......188

Tire Care....192

Using Winter Tires....192

Using Snow Chains....192

Tire Pressure Monitoring System......193

Changing a Road Wheel....194

Technical Specifications....199

Capacities and Specifications

Technical Specifications....202

Appendices

Electromagnetic compatibility....206

Type approvals....207

Type approvals....207

Type approvals....208

Type approvals....208

Occupant protection

Principle of Operation....210

Fastening the safety belts....212

Safety Belt Height Adjustment......212

Belt Minder....213

Using safety belts during pregnancy.....213

Disabling the passenger airbag......213

Engine immobilizer

Principle of Operation....215

Coded keys....215

Arming the engine immobilizer.....215

Disarming the engine immobilizer.....215

Alarm

Principle of Operation....216

Arming the alarm....218

Disarming the alarm....218

Convenience features

Sun Shades....219

Instrument Lighting Dimmer......219

Clock....219

Cigar Lighter....219

Ashtray....220

Auxiliary Power Points....220

Cup Holders....221

Glove Box....221

Storage compartments......221

Map Pockets....222

Memory Function......222

Glasses Holder....223

CD changer....223

Audio Input Jack....223

USB Port....223

Floor Mats....223

Auto-Start-Stop

Principle of Operation....224

Using start-stop....224

Eco Mode

Principle of Operation....226

Using Eco mode....226

Hill Start Assist

Principle of Operation....227

Using hill start assist....227

Active suspension

Principle of Operation....230

Using active suspension....230

Rear view camera

Principle of Operation....231

Rear View Camera....231

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Principle of Operation....234

Using Adaptive Cruise Control......235

Forward alert function....239

Speed Limiter

Principle of Operation....240

Using the speed limiter....240

Driver Alert

Principle of Operation....242

Using driver alert....242

Lane Departure Warning

Principle of Operation....244

Using lane departure warning......244

Vehicle recovery

Towing Points....246

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels.....246

Vehicle battery

Jump Starting the Vehicle....248

Changing the 12V Battery....249

Battery connection points.....249

Vehicle identification

Vehicle Identification Plate....250

Vehicle Identification Number......251

Audio introduction

Important audio information....252

Audio unit overview

Audio unit overview ......253

Audio System Security

Security code....256

Lost security code....256

Entering a security code....256

Incorrect security code....256

Audio Unit Clock and Date Displays

Setting the clock and date on the audio unit....257

Audio unit operation

On/off control....258

Bass/treble control....258

Balance/fade control....258

Audio menu control....258

Station preset buttons....260

Waveband button....260

Traffic information control....261

Station tuning control....262

Audio unit menus

Automatic volume control....264

Digital signal processing (DSP)......264

Audio distortion reduction (CLIP)......264

Alternative frequencies......265

Regional mode (REG)......265

News broadcasts....266

Compact Disc Player

Loading compact discs....267

Track selection....267

Loading the compact disc changer.....267

Unloading the compact disc changer......268

Compact disc playback....268

Fast forward/reverse....268

Shuffle/random....268

Compact disc track compression.....269

Compact disc track scanning.....269

Ejecting compact discs....269

Repeat compact disc tracks....270

MP3 file playback....270

MP3 display options....271

Ending compact disc playback......271

Auxiliary input jack

Auxiliary input jack....272

Audio Troubleshooting

Audio troubleshooting....273

Telephone

General Information......274

Telephone setup....274

Bluetooth setup....275

Telephone controls....275

Using the telephone - Vehicles Without: Navigation System......276

Using the telephone - Vehicles With: Navigation System....278

Voice control

Principle of Operation....281

Using voice control....281

Audio unit commands....282

Telephone commands....291

Navigation system commands.....296

Climate control commands....296

Connectivity

General Information......299

Connecting an external device....300

Connecting an external device - Vehicles With: Bluetooth....300

Using a USB device....301

Using an iPod....303

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

Note: This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle.

Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different models, so may appear different to you on your vehicle. However, the essential information in the illustrations is always correct.

Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations.

Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.

This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat.

A B E154903

Right-hand sideA Left-hand sideB

Protecting the Environment

You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY

Symbols in this handbook

WARNING

You risk death or serious injury to yourself and others if you do not follow the instructions highlighted e warning symbol.

CAUTION

You risk damaging your vehicle if you do not follow the instructions highlighted by the caution symbol.

Symbols on your vehicle

When you see these symbols, read and follow the relevant instructions in this handbook before touching or attempting adjustment of any kind.

REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION

Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging.

Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs

One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner's Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications.

Collision Repairs

We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During vehicle

development we validate these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts.

Warranty on Replacement Parts

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to your vehicle as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered by the Ford Warranty. For additional information, refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty.

At a Glance

Instrument panel overview - left-hand drive

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N V U T S R Q P O

E87719

At a Glance

Instrument panel overview - right-hand drive

N L M J K I H C D E F G B A P O U T S R V Q

E87720

A Lighting controls. See Lighting Control (page 45).

Air vents. See Air Vents (page 98).B

C Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 50). Telephone control buttons. See Telephone controls (page 275). Voice control buttons. See Using voice control (page 281). Lane departure warning control buttons. See Lane Departure Warning (page 244).

Audio controls. See Audio Control (page 39).D

Instrument cluster. See Gauges (page 69).E

F Information display controls. See Information Displays (page 75).

Wiper lever. See Windshield Wipers (page 41).G

H Start button. See Keyless Starting (page 118).

I Audio unit. See Audio unit overview (page 253).

Navigation unit. See separate handbook.

At a Glance

J Stability control (ESP) switch. See Using Stability Control (page 137).

Start-stop switch. See Using start-stop (page 224).

Parking aid switch. See Parking Aid (page 138).K

L Hazard warning flasher switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers (page 53).

M Passenger airbag deactivation warning lamp. See Disabling the passenger airbag (page 213).

N Heated windshield and heated rear window switches. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 103).

Climate controls. See Manual Climate Control (page 99). See Automatic Climate Control (page 101).

Cigar lighter. See Cigar Lighter (page 219).P

Q Ignition switch. See Ignition Switch (page 118).

R Cruise control and speed limiter switches. See Using Cruise Control (page 140). Adaptive cruise control switches. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 235). Speed limiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 240).

S Steering wheel adjustment lever. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 39).

Horn.T

U Cruise control and speed limiter switches. See Using Cruise Control (page 140). Adaptive cruise control switches. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 235). Speed limiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 240).

V Driver knee airbag. See Principle of Operation (page 210).

At a Glance

Electric child safety locks

Diagram of a remote control panel with icons and a warning symbol, showing a person inside the key.

E124779

See Child Safety Locks (page 27).

Keyless entry

Top-down view of a blue car with white trim and red accents, viewed from above (no text or symbols visible)

E78276

Passive locking and unlocking requires a valid passive key to be located within one of the three external detection ranges.

Unlocking the vehicle

Close-up of a car door handle with a white arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols visible)

E78278

Pull a door handle to unlock all the doors and the luggage compartment lid and disarm the alarm.

Locking the vehicle

Illustration of a blue car door with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols)

E87384

Close-up of a Ford logo on a blue car hood with a purple highlight, showing no readable text or symbols.

E87435

See Keyless Entry (page 34).

At a Glance

Adjusting the steering wheel

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.

3D rendering of a car steering wheel with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

E95178

3D rendering of a car steering wheel and head (no text or symbols visible)

E95179

See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 39).

Autowipers

A B C

E70315

High sensitivityA

B On

Low sensitivityC

Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor using the rotary control.

See Autowipers (page 41).

Changing the wiper blades

CAUTION

You can use the service position in winter to provide easier access to the wiper blades for freeing them from snow and ice. The windshield wipers will return to their normal position as soon as you switch on the ignition so make sure that the outside of the windshield is free from snow and ice before you switch on the ignition.

At a Glance

Top-down view of a car with two side-mounted gunbars on the windshield (no text or symbols visible)

E85833

Close-up of a car head panel with directional arrows and icons, no readable text or symbols

E75188

Switch off the ignition and move the wiper lever to position A within three seconds. Release the lever when the windshield wipers have moved to the service position.

See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 43).

Autolamps

Close-up of a purple circular industrial control knob with thermal and humidity indicators (no text or symbols)

E70719

The headlamps will come on and go off automatically depending on the ambient light.

See Lighting Control (page 45).

Automatic main beam control

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. A manual override may be necessary if the system fails to switch the main beam on or off.

The system will automatically switch on main beam if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. If it detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead the system will switch off main beam before it can distract other road users. Dipped beams will remain on.

See Automatic High Beam Control (page 46).

Power windows

Note: To reduce wind noise or buffeting when just one window is open, open the opposite window slightly.

See Power Windows (page 62).

At a Glance

Power folding mirrors

Close-up of a remote control with black buttons and a circular dial (no text or symbols visible)

E72623

See Power exterior mirrors (page 64).

Reverse mirror dipping

Depending on the selected mirror position, the relevant exterior mirror will dip whenever you select reverse gear, giving you a view of the kerb.

When you first use this feature, the mirrors will dip to a preset position. You can programme the degree of dipping.

See Power exterior mirrors (page 64).

Blind spot information system (BLIS)

WARNING

Do not use the system as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors, and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The system is not a replacement for careful driving and is only to be used as an aid.

The system displays a yellow indicator located in the exterior mirrors.

Close-up of a black car side panel with a white left-pointing arrow (no text or symbols)

E124736

See Blind Spot Information System (page 66).

Information displays

OK

E70499

Use the arrow buttons to navigate through the menus and press OK to make a selection.

See Information Displays (page 75).

At a Glance

Manual climate control

Cooling the interior quickly

0 1 2 3 4 → → → → → AC AC

E71381

Heating the interior quickly

Three circular industrial control knobs showing color mode and airflow direction (no text or symbols)

E71377

Recommended settings for cooling

0 1 2 3 4 A/C

E131534

Open the center and side air vents.

Direct the center air vents upwards and the side air vents toward the side windows.

Recommended settings for heating

0 1 2 3 4 A/C A/C

E131535

Close the center air vents and open the side air vents.

Direct the side air vents toward the side windows.

Defrosting and demisting the windshield

0 1 2 3 4 AIC AIC

E71382

See Manual Climate Control (page 99).

Automatic climate control

Close-up of two mechanical components labeled 'AUTO' and 'HONO', showing no visible text or symbols beyond labels.

E91391

See Automatic Climate Control (page 101).

Engine idle speed after starting

The engine may idle at a higher speed than normal immediately after starting from cold.

At a Glance

See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 118).

Keyless starting

Close-up of a Ford Power wheel with logo (no additional text or symbols visible)

E85766

Press the start button.

Stopping the engine when the vehicle is moving

WARNING

Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance.

The steering will not be locked, but higher effort will be required. When the ignition is switched off some electrical circuits, warning lamps and indicators may also be OFF.

Press and hold the start button for two seconds, or press three times within three seconds.

See Keyless Starting (page 118).

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)

WARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The DPF regeneration process creates very high exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during and after DPF regeneration, and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard.

See Diesel Particulate Filter (page 123).

Fuel filler door

Close-up of a blue car's side panel with a purple fuel tanker plug and a black arrow pointing to the tip (no text or symbols visible)

E86613

Press the door to open it. Open the door fully until it engages.

At a Glance

Diagram of a fuel nozzle with an inset showing a labeled component 'A' (no text or symbols present)

E139202

Insert the fuel nozzle up to and including the first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting on the cover of the fuel pipe opening.

WARNING

We recommend that you remove the fuel nozzle slowly to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel. Alternatively you can wait 10 seconds e removing the fuel nozzle.

Close-up of a fuel nozzle with attached plug and nozzle (no visible text or symbols)

E119081

Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove it.

See Fuel filler door (page 127).

Manual transmission

Selecting reverse gear

3D illustration of a robotic arm with an upward arrow and a dot on the base (no text or symbols)

On some vehicles it is necessary to raise the collar whilst selecting reverse gear.

See Manual Transmission (page 133).

Automatic transmission

Note: Do not press the brake pedal when removing the key from the ignition switch.

Selector lever positions

WARNING

Apply the brakes before moving the selector lever and keep them applied until you are ready to move off.

At a Glance

3D rendered image of a gray mechanical lever with a handle and control buttons (no text or symbols)

E80836

ParkP

ReverseR

NeutralN

DriveD

Manual shifting and sport modeS

See Automatic Transmission (page 133).

Rear view camera

WARNING

The camera does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

The camera is a visual aid for use when reversing.

Close-up of a car rear bumper with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

E99105

See Rear view camera (page 231).

Speed limiter

The system allows you to set a speed, to which the vehicle then becomes limited.

See Speed Limiter (page 240).

Driver alert

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

The system calculates an alertness score which can be displayed on the information display. If the system detects that you are becoming drowsy or there is deterioration in your driving style then warnings will be issued.

See Driver Alert (page 242).

Lane departure warning

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

At a Glance

Activate the system using the switches on the indicator stalk.

A ON OFF B E131360

System onA

System offB

See Lane Departure Warning (page 244).

Towing the vehicle on four wheels

CAUTION

For certain engine and transmission combinations, it is recommended not to tow the vehicle with the drive wheels on the ground.

See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 246).

CHILD SEATS

E133140 AIRBAG E68916

WARNINGS

Secure children that are less than 150 centimeters (59 inches) tall in a suitable, approved child restraint, in the rear seat.

Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!

Read and follow the manufacturer's instructions when you are fitting a child restraint.

Do not modify child restraints in any way.

Do not hold a child on your lap when the vehicle is moving.

WARNINGS

Do not leave unattended children in your vehicle.

If your vehicle has been involved in an accident, have the child restraints checked by properly trained technicians.

Note: Mandatory use of child restraints varies from country to country.

Only child restraints certified to ECE-R44.03 (or later) have been tested and approved for use in your vehicle. A choice of these are available from your Dealer.

Child restraints for different mass groups

Use the correct child restraint as follows:

Baby safety seat

3D rendered illustration of a car seatbelt with a curved handle (no text or symbols)

Secure children that weigh less than 13 kilograms (29 pounds) in a rearward facing baby safety seat (Group 0+) in the rear seat.

Child safety seat

Illustration of a child wearing a seatbelt inside a car seat (no text or symbols)

E68920

Secure children that weigh between 13 and 18 kilograms (29 and 40 pounds) in a child safety seat (Group 1) in the rear seat.

BOOSTER SEATS

WARNINGS

Do not install a booster seat or a booster cushion with only the lap strap of the safety belt.

Do not install a booster seat or a booster cushion with a safety belt that is slack or twisted.

Do not put the safety belt under your child's arm or behind its back.

Do not use pillows, books or towels to boost your child's height.

Make sure that your children sit in an upright position.

Secure children that weigh more than 15 kilograms (33 pounds) but are less than 150 centimeters (59

(inches) tall in a booster seat or a booster cushion.

CAUTION

When using a child seat on a rear seat, make sure that the child seat rests tightly against the vehicle seat. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See Head Restraints (page 111).

Booster seat (Group 2)

Silhouette of a person sitting on a seat with a back cover, wearing a seatbelt (no text or symbols)

E70710

We recommend that you use a booster seat that combines a cushion with a backrest instead of a booster cushion only. The raised seating position will allow you to position the shoulder strap of the adult safety belt over the center of your child's shoulder and the lap strap tightly across its hips.

Booster cushion (Group 3)

Silhouette of a seated person holding a long rod, no text or symbols present

E68924

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING

WARNINGS

Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford recommended child seats.

WARNINGS

Original text according to ECE R94.01: Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on t protected by an air bag in front of

When using a child restraint with a support leg on a second row seat, make sure the support leg rests ely on the floor.

When using a forward facing child seat on a second row seat, always remove the head restraint from that See Head Restraints (page 111).

When using a child seat with a safety belt, make sure that the safety belt is not slack or twisted.

Note: When using a child seat on a front seat, always adjust the front passenger seat to its fully rearwards position. If it proves difficult to tighten the lap section of the safety belt without slack remaining, adjust the seatback to the fully upright position and raise the height of the seat. See Seats (page 111).

Seating positions 3210+0	Mass group categories
					22 - 36 kg15 - 25 kg9
Front passenger seat with airbag ON					UF1UF1UF1XX
Front passenger seat with airbag OFF					U1U1U1U1U1
		Rear seats		UU	UUU

X Not suitable for children in this mass group.

U Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group.

U1 Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child seat, in the rear seat.

UF1 Suitable for universal category forward facing child seats approved for use in this mass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child seat, in the rear seat.

ISOFIX child seats

Seating positions		Mass group categories
		0+	1
		Rear facing	Forward facing
		Up to 13 kg	9 - 18 kg
Front seat	Size class	Not ISOFIX equipped
	Seat type
Rear outboard seat ISOFIX	Size class	C, D, E*	A, B, B1, C, D*
	Seat type	IL**	IL, IUF***

Child Safety

Seating positions		Mass group categories
		0+	1
			Forward facingRear faci
			9 - 18 kgUp to 13 kg
	Size classRear center seatNot ISOFIX equipped
	Seat type

IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems of the semi-universal category. Please consult child restraints systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.

IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.

*The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child restraints systems is defined by the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on ISOFIX child restraints.

**At time of publishing the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the Britax Romer Baby Safe. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford recommended child seats.

***At time of publishing the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax Romer Duo. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford recommended child seats.

ISOFIX ANCHOR POINTS

WARNING

Use an anti-rotation device when using the ISOFIX system. We recommend the use of a top tether port leg.

Your vehicle is fitted with ISOFIX anchor points that accommodate universally approved ISOFIX child restraints.

The ISOFIX system comprises two rigid attachment arms on the child restraint that attach to anchor points on the outboard rear seats, where the cushion and backrest meet. Tether anchor points are fitted behind the outboard rear seats for child restraints with a top tether.

Top tether anchor points

Mechanical component with a fastener inserted into a housing, showing a circular diagram of a person using a device (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Close-up of a vehicle seatbelt with a warning symbol (no text or labels)

E93616

Close-up of a car seatbelt with a hand operating the wheel, showing no text or symbols.

E93514

Attaching a child seat with top tethers

WARNING

Do not attach a tether strap to anything other than the correct tether anchor point.

Note: Where applicable, remove the luggage cover to ease installation. See Luggage Covers (page 146).

Note: On 4-door vehicles, make sure the tether strap tightening mechanism remains accessible when the seatback is fully engaged.

3D rendered image of a car seat assembly with a directional arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

E87591

1. Place the child seat on the back seat cushion and fold the relevant seatback forwards. See Rear Seats (page 115).
2. Remove the head restraint. See Head Restraints (page 111).

WARNING

Make sure the top tether strap is not slack or twisted and is properly located on the anchor point.

1. Route the tether strap to the anchor point.

WARNING

Make sure that the seatback is secure and fully engaged in the catch.

1. Push the seatback to the upright position.

ISOFIX E87145

E87145

1. Push the child seat back firmly to engage the ISOFIX lower anchor points.
2. Tighten the tether strap in line with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

WARNING

You cannot open the doors from inside if you have put the child safety locks on.

Manual child safety locks

Note: On vehicles with keyless entry, use the spare key. See Keyless Entry (page 34).

Interior view of a car showing the door, seatbelt, and keyhole (no text or symbols visible)

E124779

Left-hand side

Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock.

Right-hand side

Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock.

Electric child safety locks

Note: Pressing the switch will also disable the rear power window switches.

GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES

CAUTIONS

The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short distance radio transmissions (e.g. amateur radios, medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm systems). If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key.

Check your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended. This will safeguard against any potential cious frequency blocking.

Note: You could unlock the doors if you press the buttons on the remote control unintentionally.

The operating range between your remote control and your vehicle varies depending on the environment.

PROGRAMMING THEREMOTE CONTROL

You can program a maximum of eight remote controls to use with your vehicle (including any supplied with your vehicle).

Programming a new remote control

1. Insert the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the key from position 0 to 11 and then back to 0 four times within six seconds.
3. Leave the key in position 0 and press any button on the remote control within 10 seconds. You will receive confirmation via a chime or LED that programming has been successful.

Note: Further remote controls may be programmed at this stage.

1. Press any button on each additional remote control within 10 seconds of each other.

Reprogramming the unlocking function

Note: When you press the unlock button either all the doors are unlocked or only the driver's door is unlocked. Pressing the unlock button again unlocks all the doors.

Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons on the remote key simultaneously for at least four seconds with the ignition off. The direction indicators will flash twice to confirm the change.

To return to the original unlocking function, repeat the process.

CHANGING THE REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way.

Seek advice from your local authority regarding recycling.

Remote Control With Folding Key Blade

Diagram of a mobile phone with directional arrows indicating flow or movement, showing internal components (no text or symbols)

E74383

1. Insert a screwdriver as far as possible into the slot on the side of the remote control, push it towards the key blade and remove the key blade.

3D illustration of a mechanical component with a tool inserted, labeled with number 2 (no text or symbols on the object itself)

E74384

1. Twist the screwdriver in the position shown to start separating the two halves of the remote control.

3D diagram of a mechanical component with a cable and labeled part 'E74385' (no text or symbols on the object itself)

1. Twist the screwdriver in the position shown to separate the two halves of the remote control.

3D mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components with a numbered arrow indicating part 4 (no text or symbols present)

E126280

CAUTION

Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver.

1. Carefully prise out the battery with the screwdriver.
2. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) with the + facing downwards.
3. Assemble the two halves of the remote control.
4. Install the key blade.

Remote Control Without a Folding Key Blade

E87964

1. Press and hold the buttons on the edges to release the cover. Carefully remove the cover.
2. Remove the key blade.

3D rendered image of a tool interacting with a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

E105362

1. Twist the screwdriver in the position shown to start separating the two halves of the remote control.

White plastic electronic device with a cable inserted, showing internal components and a numbered label '4' (no text or symbols on the device itself)

E119190

1. Twist the screwdriver in the position shown to separate the two halves of the remote control.

3D rendered mechanical component with a lever and part, labeled with number 5 (no text or symbols on the object itself)

E125860

CAUTION

Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver.

1. Carefully remove the battery with the screwdriver.
2. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) with the + facing downwards.
3. Assemble the two halves of the remote control.
4. Install the key blade.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

CAUTION

Check your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.

Central locking

You can only centrally lock the doors if they are all closed.

Note: The driver's door can be unlocked with the key. This needs to be used if the remote control or keyless entry is not functioning.

Note: Central locking also locks and unlocks the fuel filler door.

Double locking

WARNING

Do not activate double locking when persons or animals are inside the vehicle. You will not be able to ask the doors from the inside if you have le locked them.

Close-up of a white airplane seat cover with a black 'X' symbol, no text or symbols present.

E71961

Double locking is a theft protection feature that prevents someone from opening the doors from the inside. You can only double lock the doors if they are all closed.

Locking and unlocking confirmation

When you unlock the doors, the direction indicators will flash once.

When you lock the doors, the direction indicators will flash twice.

Locking and unlocking the doors with the key

B A A B

E71962

UnlockA

LockB

Double locking the doors with the key

Turn the key to the lock position twice within three seconds to double lock the doors.

Locking and unlocking the doors and the luggage compartment lid with the remote control

E87379

UnlockA

LockB

C Luggage compartment lid unlock (press twice)

Locking the doors and the luggage compartment lid with the remote control

Press button B once.

Double locking the doors and the luggage compartment lid with the remote control

Press button B twice within three seconds.

Locking and unlocking the doors from inside

Driver's door

A B

E71958

Lock all doorsA

Unlock all doorsB

Front and rear passenger doors

Close-up of a flight suit's side panel with an arrow icon pointing to the down-right corner (no text or symbols)

E98653

To lock the front and rear passenger doors individually, press the button and close the door when leaving the vehicle.

Luggage compartment lid

Opening the luggage compartment lid with the remote control

Press button C on the remote control twice within three seconds.

Closing the luggage compartment lid 4-door

Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a small inset detail (no visible text or symbols)

E89131

5-door

Close-up of a mechanical component with a downward arrow indicating a feature (no text or symbols visible)

E89132

Wagon

Close-up of a mechanical component with a downward arrow indicating a feature (no text or symbols visible)

E89133

A recessed grip is incorporated inside the luggage compartment lid to facilitate closing.

Automatic relocking

The doors will relock automatically if you do not open a door within 45 seconds of unlocking the doors with the remote control. The door locks and the alarm will return to their previous state.

Reprogramming the unlocking function

The unlocking function may be reprogrammed so that only the driver's door is unlocked. See Programming the remote control (page 29).

KEYLESS ENTRY

General information

WARNING

The keyless entry system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as hones.

Note: If the door handles are pulled repeatedly during a short period of time without the presence of a valid passive key, the system will become inoperable for 30 seconds.

The passive entry system will not function if:

•The passive key frequencies are jammed.
• The passive key battery is flat.

Note: If the passive entry system does not function, you will need to use the key blade to lock and unlock your vehicle.

The keyless system allows the driver to operate the vehicle without the use of a key or remote control.

Top-down view of a blue car with white roof and red side panel, viewed from above (no text or symbols visible)

E78276

Passive locking and unlocking requires a valid passive key to be located within one of the three external detection ranges. These are located approximately one and a half meters from the driver and front passenger door handles and the luggage compartment lid.

Passive key

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked with the passive key. The passive key can also be used as a remote control. See Locking and Unlocking (page 32).

Locking the vehicle

WARNING

The vehicle does not lock itself automatically. If no locking button is pressed, the vehicle will remain locked.

Note: The ignition will automatically switch off when you lock your vehicle from the outside. This is to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging.

Note: If locking from the luggage compartment lid, the passive key must be within the luggage compartment lid detection range.

Close-up of a blue car door handle with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

E87384

Close-up of a Ford logo on a blue background (no additional text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a car's side panel with a purple button and black arrow pointing to it, against a blue background (no text or symbols)

Locking buttons are located on each of the front doors and the luggage compartment lid.

To activate central locking and arm the alarm:

- Press a locking button once.

To activate double locking, to arm the alarm and the interior sensors:

- Press a locking button twice within three seconds.

Note: Once activated, the vehicle will remain locked for approximately three seconds. This is to allow you to pull a door handle and check if the vehicle is locked. When the delay period is over, the doors can be opened again, provided the passive key is within the respective detection range.

Luggage compartment lid

Note: The luggage compartment lid cannot be closed and will pop back up if the passive key is located inside the luggage compartment.

Note: If a second valid passive key is located within the luggage compartment lid detection range, the luggage compartment lid can be closed.

Unlocking the vehicle

Note: If the vehicle remains locked for longer than five days, the system will enter an energy-saving mode. This is to reduce the discharge of the vehicle battery. When the vehicle is unlocked while in this mode, the reaction time of the system may be a little longer than normal. Unlocking the vehicle once will deactivate the energy-saving mode.

Illustration of a futuristic car interior with a downward arrow indicating speed or flow (no text or symbols)

E78278

Pull one of the door handles or the luggage compartment lid handle.

Note: A valid passive key must be located within the detection range of that door.

One long flash of the direction indicators confirms that all the doors, the luggage compartment lid and the fuel filler flap have been unlocked and that the alarm has been disarmed.

Unlocking only the driver's door

If the unlocking function is reprogrammed so that only the driver's door is unlocked (See Keys and Remote Controls (page 29).), note the following:

If the driver's door is the first door which is opened, the other doors and the luggage compartment lid will remain locked. Doors can be unlocked individually by pulling the interior door handles on those doors.

If the front passenger door or one of the rear doors is the first door which is opened, all the doors and the luggage compartment lid will be unlocked.

Disabled keys

Any keys left inside the vehicle interior when it is locked will be disabled.

A disabled key cannot be used to turn the ignition on or start the engine.

In order to use these passive keys again, they have to be enabled.

To enable all your passive keys, unlock the vehicle using a passive key or the remote control unlocking function.

All passive keys will then be enabled if the ignition is turned on or the vehicle is started using a valid key.

Locking and unlocking the doors with the key blade

E87964

1. Carefully remove the cover.
2. Remove the key blade and insert it into the lock.

GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING

You can also operate the power windows with the ignition off via the global opening and global closing function.

Note: Global closing will only operate if you have set the memory correctly for each window. See Power Windows (page 62).

Global opening

Close-up of a car door with two downward arrows and a padlock icon (no text or symbols)

To open all the windows, press and hold the unlock button for at least three seconds. Press either the lock or the unlock button again to stop the opening function.

Global closing

Vehicles without keyless entry

WARNING Take care when using global closing In an emergency, press a button immediately to stop. E71956

To close all the windows, press and hold the lock button for at least three seconds. Press any button again to stop the closing function. The anti-trap function is also active during global closing.

Vehicles with keyless entry

Illustration of a blue car door with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols)

E87384

WARNING

Take care when using global closing. In an emergency, press the button on the driver's door handle to stop.

Note: Global closing can be activated using the button on the driver's door handle. Global opening and closing can also be activated using the buttons on the passive key.

To close all the windows, press and hold the button on the driver's door handle for at least two seconds. The anti-trap function is also active during global closing.

ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 111).

3D rendering of a car steering wheel with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

E95178

3D rendering of a car steering wheel and head, showing a purple sensor on the steering wheel (no text or symbols)

E95179

WARNING

Make sure that you fully engage the locking lever when returning it to its original position.

AUDIO CONTROL

E A D M B C

E72288

Volume upA

Seek upB

Volume downC

Seek downD

ModeE

Mode

Press and hold the mode button to select the audio source.

Press the mode button to:

• tune the radio to the next preset station
- play the next CD
- play the other side of a cassette tape
- accept an incoming telephone call.
·end a telephone call.

Seek

Press a seek button to:

• tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band
- play the next or the previous CD track
- fast forward or rewind the cassette tape.

Press and hold a seek button to:

• tune the radio up or down the frequency band

- seek through a CD track.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS

D C B A E70696

Single wipeA

Intermittent wipeB

Normal wipeC

High speed wipeD

Intermittent wipe

A B C E70315

Short wipe intervalA

Intermittent wipeB

Long wipe intervalC

AUTOWIPERS

CAUTIONS

Do not switch autowipers on in dry weather conditions. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield.
Replace the wiper blades as soon as they begin to leave bands of water and smears. If you do not replace them, the rain sensor will continue to detect water on the windshield and the wipers will operate, even though the majority of the windshield is dry.
Fully defrost the windshield in icy conditions before you switch autowipers on.
Switch autowipers off before you enter a car wash.

A B C E70315

High sensitivityA

B On

Low sensitivityC

If you switch autowipers on, the wipers will not cycle until water is detected on the windshield. The rain sensor will then continuously measure the amount of water on the windshield and adjust the speed of the wipers automatically.

Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor using the rotary control. With low sensitivity, the wipers will operate when the sensor detects a lot of water on the windshield. With high sensitivity, the wipers will operate if the sensor detects a small amount of water on the windshield.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

WARNING

Do not operate the windshield washers for more than 10 seconds or when the reservoir is empty.

Note: The washer jets are heated when the ignition is on.

Close-up of a remote control handle with buttons and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

E70776

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS

Intermittent wipe

Close-up of a curved mechanical component with a downward arrow indicating motion or force (no text or symbols visible)

E70777

Reverse gear wipe

The rear window wiper will operate automatically when you select reverse gear if the wiper lever is in position B, C or D.

Washer

WARNING

Do not operate the rear window washer for more than 10 seconds or when the reservoir is empty.

Close-up of a curved mechanical component with a downward arrow indicating motion or force (no text or symbols visible)

E70777

Pull the lever fully towards the steering wheel and hold it to operate the washer.

HEADLAMP WASHERS

The headlamp washers will operate with the windshield washers when the headlamps are on.

Note: To stop the washer fluid reservoir emptying quickly, the headlamp washers will not operate every time that you use the windshield washers.

CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES

3D rendering of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a feature (no text or symbols visible)

E66644

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness.

Clean the wiper blade lips with water applied with a soft sponge.

CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES

Windshield wiper blades

CAUTIONS

Set the windshield wipers in the service position to change the wiper blades.

You can use the service position in winter to provide easier access to the wiper blades for freeing them from snow and ice. Make sure that the outside windshield is free from snow and ice are using the wipers.

Service position

Top-down view of a car with two visible exhaust windows (no text or symbols)

E85833

Close-up of a black electric shaver handle with control panel and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Switch off the ignition and move the wiper lever to position A within three seconds. Release the lever when the windshield wipers have moved to the service position.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Set the windshield wipers in the service position and lift the wiper arms.

Mechanical component diagram showing a shaft and housing with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

1
E72899

1. Press the locking button.
2. Remove the wiper blade.

Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place.

1. Install in the reverse order.

Rear window wiper blades

Changing the rear window wiper blades - Wagon

1. Lift the wiper arm.

E86456 2 3 4

1. Position the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm.

2. Disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place.

1. Install in the reverse order.

Changing the rear window wiper blades - 5-door

1. Lift the wiper arm.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts 2, 3, and directional arrows indicating flow or movement.

E86457

1. Press the locking button.
2. Remove the wiper blade.

Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place.

1. Install in the reverse order.

LIGHTING CONTROL

Lighting control positions

A B C E70718

A Off
Side and tail lampsB
HeadlampsC

Parking lamps

CAUTION

Prolonged use of the parking lamps will discharge the battery.

Switch off the ignition.

Both sides

Set the lighting control to position B.

One side

3D diagram of a curved object with directional arrows labeled A and B, no text or symbols present

E75505
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB

High and low beam

Black handheld device with control buttons and a downward arrow indicator (no text or symbols on the device itself)

E70725

Pull the lever fully towards the steering wheel to switch between high and low beam.

Headlamp flasher

Pull the lever slightly towards the steering wheel.

Home safe lighting

Switch the ignition off and pull the direction indicator lever towards the steering wheel to switch the headlamps on. You will hear a short tone. The headlamps will go off automatically after three minutes with any door open, or 30 seconds after the last door has been closed.

With all doors closed, but within the 30 second delay, opening any door will result in the three minute timer starting again.

The home safe lights can be cancelled by either pulling the direction indicator lever towards the steering wheel again or by turning the ignition switch on.

AUTOLAMPS

Close-up of a purple action button with white symbols on the left (no readable text or numbers)

E70719

Note: If you have switched autolamps on, you can only switch the high beam on when autolamps has switched the headlamps on.

The headlamps will come on and go off automatically depending on the ambient light.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS

The lamps will illuminate when the ignition is on.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL

WARNINGS

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. A manual

override may be necessary if the system fails to switch the main beam on or off.

WARNINGS

A manual override may be required when approaching other road users such as cyclists.

Do not use the system in fog.

CAUTIONS

In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. A manual override may be necessary in these cases.

Reflective road signs may be detected as oncoming traffic and the headlamps may be switched to low beam.

If the lights of oncoming vehicles are hidden by obstacles (for example guard rails) the system may not deactivate the high beam.

Always fit Ford Original Parts when replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may reduce system performance.

Check and replace wiper blades regularly to ensure the camera sensor has a clear view through the windscreen. Replacement wiper blades must be the correct length.

Note: Keep the windscreen free from obstructions such as bird droppings, insects and snow or ice.

The system will automatically switch on main beam if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. If it detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead the system will switch off main beam before it can distract other road users. Dipped beams will remain on.

A camera sensor is centrally mounted behind the windshield of the vehicle, and monitors conditions continuously to decide when to switch the high beam off and on.

Once the system is active the high beam will switch on if:

• It is dark enough to require the use of high beams and
• there is no traffic or street lighting ahead and
• vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 mph).

The high beam will switch off if:

•The ambient light is high enough that high beam is not required.
- An approaching vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps are detected.
- Street lighting is detected.
- Vehicle speed falls below 25 km/h (16 mph).
• The camera sensor is too hot or becomes blocked.

Activating the system

Switch on the system using the information display and autolamps. See Information Displays (page 75). See Autolamps (page 46).

Close-up of a purple circular industrial control knob with icons for lighting, heat, and sun (no text or symbols)

E70719

Turn the switch to the autolamps position.

Note: The system may take a short time to initialize after first switching the ignition on, especially in very dark conditions. The high beam will not automatically switch on during this period.

Setting the system sensitivity

The system has three sensitivity levels which can be accessed via the information display. See Information Displays (page 75).

The sensitivity determines the speed at which the high beam will be restored after detected traffic leaves the field of view.

Manually overriding the system

Black handheld device with control buttons and a downward arrow indicator (no text or symbols on the device body)

E70725

Use the high beam lever to switch between high beam and low beam.

Note: This is a temporary override and the system will return to automatic operation after a short period.

To permanently deactivate the system use the information display menu or turn the lighting control switch from autolamps to headlamps.

FRONT FOG LAMPS

扣

E70721

WARNING

Only use the front fog lamps when visibility is considerably restricted by fog, snow or rain.

REAR FOG LAMPS

Close-up of a black circular button with a white speaker symbol and an arrow pointing to it (no text or numbers visible)

E70720

Note: Only use the rear fog lamps when visibility is restricted to less than 50 meters (164 feet).

Note: Do not use the rear fog lamps when it is raining or snowing and visibility is more than 50 meters (164 feet).

HEADLAMP LEVELING

Note: Vehicles with Xenon headlamps are equipped with automatic headlamp leveling.

#D A B E70722

Raised headlamp beamsA Lowered headlamp beamsB

You can adjust the level of the headlamp beams according to the vehicle load.

Recommended headlamp leveling switch positions

Load		compartmentfront seats	Switch positionLoad in lugg
	Second row seatsFront seats
			0--1-2
		--1-2	0 (0.5 ^2 )
		-31-2	1 (0.5 ^2 )

Lighting

Load		compartmentFront seats	Switch positionLoad in l
	Second row seats
1-2	3	Max ^1	3 (0.5 ^2 )
1	-	Max ^1	4 (1.5 ^2 )

^1 See Vehicle identification (page 250).
^2 Vehicles with active suspension.

ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS

A B

A B

E72897

without AFSA

with AFSB

The AFS adjusts the headlamp low beam depending on vehicle direction and speed. It improves visibility when you are driving at night and helps to reduce headlamp glare for oncoming drivers.

The system will not operate when the vehicle is stationary, when you have switched on the daytime running lamps or when you have selected reverse gear.

A message will appear in the information display if the system malfunctions. See Information Messages (page 88). The

headlamps will move to a fixed central or low beam position. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Cornering lamps

A B

E72898

A B

Headlamp beamA
Cornering lamp beamB

The cornering lamps illuminate the inside of a corner when you are turning.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

3D rendered image of a curved object with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

E70727

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash only three times.

INTERIOR LAMPS

Courtesy lamp

A B C 30 0 1 2

E71945

A Off

Door contactB

C On

If you set the switch to position B, the courtesy lamp will come on when you unlock or open a door or the luggage compartment lid. If you leave a door open with the ignition switch off, the courtesy lamp will go off automatically after some time to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging. To switch it back on, switch on the ignition for a short time.

The courtesy lamp will also come on when you switch off the ignition. It will go off automatically after a short time or when you start or restart the engine.

If you set the switch to position C with the ignition switch off, the courtesy lamp will come on. It will go off automatically after a short time to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging. To switch it back on, switch on the ignition for a short time.

Reading lamps

Diagram of a device control panel with labeled buttons and directional arrows indicating action or movement

E71946

If you switch off the ignition, the reading lamps will go off automatically after some time to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging. To switch them back on, switch on the ignition for a short time.

LED Interior lighting

Note: Individual lamps may be switched on independently, but not off if all lamps have been switched on by the driver.

Note: All other lamps will be either non-switchable or with individual reading or dome lamp functionality only.

The lamps will come on when you unlock or open a door or the luggage compartment lid. If you leave a door open with the ignition switch off, all lamps will go off automatically after some time to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging. To switch them back on, switch on the ignition for a short time.

Side mounted lamp

A E139419 C B

Reading lamp on and off switchA Door function switchB All lamps on and off switchC

If you press switch B all lamps remain off when the door is opened. Press the switch again to reverse.

You can control all lamps using switch C.

Center mounted lamp

A B D C E139420

A Right-hand side reading lamp on and off switch
B Left-hand side reading lamp on and off switch
Door function switchC
All lamps on and off switchD

If you press switch C all lamps remain off when the door is opened. Press the switch again to reverse.

You can control all lamps using switch D.

Vanity mirror lamps

A B

E72900

A Off

B On

If you switch off the ignition, the vanity mirror lamps will go off automatically after a short time to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging. To switch them back on, switch on the ignition for a short time.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

To adjust the headlamps for driving on the left or right hand side of the road, see your dealer.

Have Xenon bulbs changed by a trained technician. There is a risk of electric shock.

1. Open the hood. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 169).

Mechanical assembly diagram showing components with arrows indicating movement or force (no readable text or symbols)

1. Remove the screws.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a feature, no visible text or symbols.

1. Remove the plastic screw and retainer.

5 4 E85996

1. Carefully pull the corner of the grille and bumper towards the front of the vehicle.
2. Carefully lift the corner of the headlamp and push it as far as possible towards the back of the vehicle.

6 7

E88982

1. Carefully pull the headlamp towards the center of the vehicle, behind the grille and bumper, to disengage it from the lower outer fixing point.
2. Remove the headlamp.

CAUTION

When fitting the headlamp, take care not to damage the locating points.

Note: When fitting the headlamp, make sure that you fully engage the headlamp in the lower outer fixing point.

Note: When fitting the headlamp, tighten the front screw first and then the rear screw.

CHANGING A BULB

WARNINGS

Switch the lights and the ignition off.

Let the bulb cool down before removing it.

Have Xenon bulbs changed by a trained technician. There is a risk of electric shock.

CAUTIONS

Do not touch the glass of the bulb.

Only fit bulbs of the correct specification. See Bulb Specification Chart (page 60).

Note: The following instructions describe how to remove the bulbs. Fit replacements in the reverse order unless otherwise stated.

Headlamp

Note: Remove the covers to gain access to the bulbs.

Direction indicator

1. Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 53).

Mechanical component diagram showing a knob and adjustment mechanism (no text or symbols)

E72259

1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.
2. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it counterclockwise and remove it.

Headlamp main beam

1. Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 53).

Diagram of a mechanical device with labeled parts 2 and 3, showing internal components and directional arrows.

E72261

1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Release the clip and remove the bulb.

Headlamp dipped beam

1. Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 53).

2 3 E72260

1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.
2. Remove the bulb.

Cornering lamp

1. Remove the headlamp. See Removing a Headlamp (page 53).

Diagram of a mechanical device with labeled parts 2 and 3, showing internal components and directional arrows.

E72262

1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Release the clip and remove the bulb.

Daytime running lamps

Note: These are not serviceable items, please consult your dealer if they fail.

Side profile of a car's front bumper with a black arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols visible)

Side repeater

3D rendered mechanical component with a highlighted section and arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

1. Carefully remove the side repeater.
   

3D illustration of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

E72291

1. Remove the bulb holder.

2. Remove the bulb.

Approach lamp

Note: Position the mirror glass as far inwards as possible.

Close-up of a white electronic device component with a black arrow pointing to a specific part, labeled 'E72264' (no other text or symbols visible)

1. Insert a screwdriver into the gap between the mirror housing and the mirror glass and release the metal retaining clip.
   

3 2

E72265
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Remove the bulb.

Front fog lamps

4 2 3 1 E72267

E72267

Note: You cannot separate the fog lamp bulb from the bulb holder.

Note: Do not remove the screws.

1. Loosen the screws.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.

Rear lamps
Direction indicator

1 E86003

1. Remove the trim panel.

Close-up of a mechanical component with bolts and a central knob (no visible text or symbols)

E131687

1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.
2. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it counterclockwise and remove it.

Rear and brake lamp

Note: These are not serviceable items, please consult your dealer if they fail.

Reversing lamp and fog lamp

Diagram of a vehicle's side profile showing front and rear views with a highlighted section (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the trim panel.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a curved window and internal components (no visible text or symbols)

1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.
2. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it counterclockwise and remove it.

Central high mounted brake lamp

Note: These are not serviceable items, please consult your dealer if they fail.

License plate lamp

Diagram showing three labeled components of a device or sensor assembly, with arrows indicating direction and numbered parts.

E72789

1. Carefully release the spring clip.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Remove the bulb.

Interior lamps

Vehicles with LED lamps

Note: These are not serviceable items, please consult your dealer if they fail.

3D rendered object resembling a remote control panel or device with no visible text or symbols

Vehicles without interior sensors

Diagram of car rear vent with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating flow or movement

E72788

1. Carefully prise out the lens.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb.

Vehicles with interior sensors

Top-down view of a car interior showing the backrest and side panel with numbered arrows (no text or symbols)

E72787

1. Carefully prise out the lens.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb.

Reading lamps
Vehicles without interior sensors

3 3 2

E72796

1. Carefully prise out the lens.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb.

Vehicles with interior sensors

Diagram showing car rearview and front panel with numbered components, likely for electronics or camera labeling.

E72786

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it.

Lighting

3D rendered mechanical component with a lever and pin, labeled with number 3 (no text or symbols on the object itself)

E73939

1. Remove the bulb.

Vanity mirror lamp

Interior view of a vehicle showing internal components and airflow direction (no text or symbols)

E72785

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. Remove the bulb.

Luggage compartment lamp

Mechanical component with directional arrows indicating motion or flow (no text or symbols)

E72784

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. Remove the bulb.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

		Power (watt)Specification
		21PY21WFront directi
		55H1Headlamp main
		55H7Headlamp dippe
		55H1Cornering lamp
		5W5WSide repeater
		5W5WApproach lam
Front fog lamp		35H8
		5W5WSide lamp

Lighting

		Power (watt)Specificat
		21PY21WRear dire
		21H21WRear fog la
		21P21WReversing
		5W5WLicense pla
		10FestoonInterior
		5BA9sReading la
		5W5WVanity mir
		6W6WLuggage c

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

Do not operate the power windows unless they are free from obstruction.

Note: If you operate the switches often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain time to prevent damage due to overheating.

Note: You can operate the windows for several minutes after you switch off the ignition. They will be deactivated as soon as a door is opened.

Note: If you operate both the switch on the relevant door and the switch for that window on the driver's door at the same time, the window will stop moving.

Switch on the ignition to operate the power windows.

Global opening and global closing

You can also operate the power windows with the ignition off via the global opening and global closing function. See Global Opening and Closing (page 37).

Note: Global opening and global closing will open or close the windows automatically only on vehicles equipped with four power windows.

Note: Global closing will only operate if you have set the memory correctly for each window.

Driver's door switches

Close-up of a purple keyboard key with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

E121510

You can operate all the windows with the switches on the door trim panel of the driver's door.

Front and rear passengers' door switches

Close-up of a car's side panel with arrows pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)

E70849

Opening and closing the windows automatically

Press or lift the switch to the second action point and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the windows.

Safety switch for rear windows

WARNING

On some vehicles, pressing the switch will also lock the rear doors from inside. See Child Safety

Locks (page 27).

Note: You can always operate the rear windows from the driver's door.

Close-up of a gray remote control knob with black function keys and an arrow pointing to the left (no text or symbols visible)

E121511

A switch in the driver's door disables the rear power window switches.

The light in the switch illuminates and the lights in the rear window switches go off when the rear windows are disabled.

Anti-trap function

WARNING

Careless closing of the windows can override the protection function and cause injuries.

The power windows will stop automatically while closing and reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way.

Overriding the anti-trap function

CAUTION

While you close the window for the third time, the anti-trap function is disabled. Make sure there are no acles in the way of the closing window.

To override this protection function when there is a resistance, for example, in the winter, proceed as follows:

1. Close the window twice until it reaches the resistance and let it reverse.
2. Close the window a third time to the resistance. The anti-trap function is disabled and you cannot close the window automatically. The window will override the resistance and you can close it fully.
3. If the window does not close after the third attempt, have it checked by a properly trained technician.

Resetting the memory of the power windows

WARNING

The anti-trap function is deactivated until you have reset the memory.

After the battery has been disconnected from the vehicle you must reset the memory separately for each window:

1. Lift the switch until the window is fully closed. Hold the switch lifted for one more second.
2. Release the switch and lift it again, two or three times, for one more second.
3. Open the window and try to close it automatically.
4. Reset and repeat procedure if the window does not close automatically.

Safety mode

WARNING

The anti-trap function is not active during this procedure.

If the system detects a malfunction, it enters a safety mode. The windows will move for only about 0.5 seconds at a time and then stop again. Close the windows by pressing the switch again when the windows stop moving. Have this checked immediately.

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

WARNING

Do not overestimate the distance of the objects that you see in the convex mirror. Objects seen in ex mirrors will appear smaller and er away than they actually are.

Manual folding mirrors

Folding

Push the mirror towards the door window glass.

Unfolding

Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position.

POWER EXTERIOR MIRRORS

E70846

A B C

Left-hand mirrorA

B Off

Right-hand mirrorC

Mirror tilting positions

Top-down view of a circular mechanical component with four directional arrows (no text or symbols)

E70847

The power exterior mirrors are fitted with a heating element that will defrost or demist the mirror glass. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 103).

Power folding mirrors

Automatic folding and unfolding

Note: If the mirrors have been folded using the manual fold button they can only be unfolded using the manual fold button.

The mirrors will fold automatically when you lock the vehicle with the key, the remote control or a keyless entry system request. The mirrors will unfold when you unlock the vehicle with the key, the remote control, a keyless entry system request, the driver's interior door handle or starting the engine.

Manual folding and unfolding

The power folding mirrors operate with the ignition on.

Note: You can operate the mirrors (mirror tilting and folding) for several minutes after you switch off the ignition. They will be deactivated as soon as a door is opened.

Close-up of a remote control with buttons and a black arrow pointing to the right (no text or symbols visible)

E72623

Press the button to fold or unfold the mirrors.

If you press the switch again while the mirrors are moving, they will stop and reverse the direction of movement.

Note: When the mirrors are operated often during a short period of time, the system may become inoperable for a period of time to prevent damage due to overheating.

Reverse mirror dipping

Depending on the switch position (A or C), the relevant exterior mirror will dip whenever you select reverse gear, giving you a view of the curb.

Note: You can disable this feature by leaving the switch in position B.

The exterior mirror will return to the original position:

• If the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).
• Approximately 10 seconds after reverse gear has been disengaged.
• If the switch is returned to position B.

When you first use this feature, the mirror will dip to a preset position. This position can be adjusted using the following sequence:

1. Turn the ignition on. Do not start the engine.
2. Select the desired exterior mirror (A or C).
3. Select reverse gear, the selected exterior mirror will adjust to a preset position.
4. Adjust the mirror to the required dipped position.
5. Disengage reverse gear or press and hold the desired memory pre-set button until a single chime sounds to confirm. See Memory Function (page 222).

The settings will be stored automatically.

AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR

3D rendering of a car front mirror with no text or symbols visible

E71028

The auto-dimming mirror will adjust automatically when hit by glaring light from behind. It will not work when you have selected reverse gear.

The system is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or objects. The system only provides a warning to assist you in detecting vehicles in the blind spot zones. The system will not detect obstacles, pedestrians, motorcyclists or cyclists.

Do not use the system as a replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors, and looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The system is not a replacement for careful driving and is only to be used as an aid.

The system is a convenience feature that aids the driver in detecting vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone (A). The detection area is on both sides of the vehicle extending rearwards from the exterior mirrors to approximately 3 meters (10 feet) beyond the bumper. The system will alert you if certain vehicles enter the blind spot zone whilst driving.

A A

E124788

Using the system

The system displays a yellow indicator located in the exterior mirrors.

Close-up of a black car side button with a white arrow pointing left (no text or symbols)

E124736

Note: Both indicators will illuminate briefly when you switch the ignition on to confirm that the system is operational.

Note: On vehicles with automatic transmission, the system is active only in S, D and N.

The system is only active when you exceed 10 km/h (6 mph). The system is temporarily deactivated when you select reverse gear.

System detection and alerts

The system will trigger the alert for vehicles that enter the blind spot zone from the rear or merge from the side. Vehicles that you pass, or vehicles that enter the blind spot zone from the front, will only trigger the alert after the vehicle has remained in the blind spot zone for a short period of time.

Note: Vehicles that pass through the blind zone quickly (typically less than 2 seconds) will not trigger the alert.

The system consists of two radar sensors each located behind the rear wheels hidden behind the bumpers.

CAUTIONS

Do not place items such as bumper stickers in this area.

Repairs to these areas using body filler will affect the performance of the system.

Close-up of a car wheel rim with a black arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols on the object itself)

Detection limitations

There may be certain instances where vehicles entering and exiting the blind spot zones may not be detected.

Instances which may cause non-detection:

• Debris build up on the rear bumper panels in the area of the sensors.
  •Certain manoeuvring of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone.

• Vehicles passing through the blind zone at high speed.

• Severe weather conditions.
  •Several vehicles passing through the blind zone following each other closely.

False alerts

Note: False alerts are temporary and will self correct.

There may be certain instances when the system will alert with no vehicle present in the blind zone.

Circumstances where false alerts may occur:

• Road guardrails.
  • Highway concrete walls.
• Construction areas.
• Sharp turns around a building.
  •Bushes and trees.
  •Cyclists and motorcyclists.
• Coming to a stop with a vehicle directly behind but very close.

Turning the system on and off

Note: The on or off position will remain until manually changed.

You can turn the system on and off using the information display. See Information Displays (page 75).

When you turn the system off no further alerts will be received. The BLIS warning indicator will illuminate. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 71).

Detection errors

Note: The alert indicator in the mirror will not illuminate.

If the system senses a fault on either sensor, the system warning symbol will illuminate and remain on. The information display will confirm the fault and indicate whether the left or right side is affected.

Blocked sensor

WARNING

Prior to the system recognizing a blocked condition and issuing a warning, the number of missed ts will increase.

CAUTION

The sensors may not detect vehicles in heavy rain or other conditions that cause disruptive reflections.

Note: Keep the rear bumper area surrounding the sensors free from dirt, ice and snow.

If a sensor becomes blocked the system performance may degrade. A blocked sensor message may be displayed.

The system will automatically return to normal operation once two other vehicles have been detected on both sides.

Trailer towing false alerts

CAUTION

Vehicles fitted with a trailer tow module not approved by us may not correctly be detected. Switch the em off to avoid false alerts. See Information Displays (page 75).

If the vehicle is fitted with a trailer tow module approved by us, the system will detect a connected trailer and deactivate. A confirmation message will be shown in the information display. See Information Messages (page 88). The BLIS warning indicator will illuminate. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 71).

GAUGES

Type 1 and 2

A B C D 60 120 0 1/1 rpm x1000 8 100 km/h 140 160 80 60 40 20 5 260

E72984

TachometerA

Engine coolant temperature gaugeB

Fuel gaugeC

SpeedometerD

Type 3

A B Engine temperature 120°C 60°C 325.0 km 1355.8 km 123456 km E D C E130765

TachometerA

SpeedometerB

Engine coolant temperature gaugeC

Fuel gaugeD

Message center. See Information Displays (page 75).E

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Note: On type 3 this gauge is shown within the message center and will not be displayed unless required. See Information Displays (page 75).

Shows the temperature of the engine coolant. At normal operating temperature, the indicator will remain in the center section.

CAUTION

Do not restart the engine until the cause of overheating has been resolved.

If the indicator moves towards 120°C, the engine is overheating. Stop the engine, switch the ignition off and determine the cause once the engine has cooled down. See Engine Coolant Check (page 181).

Fuel gauge

Note: On type 3 this gauge is shown within the message center.

The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol tells you on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler cap is located.

WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS

The following warning lamps and indicators will illuminate briefly when you switch the ignition on to confirm that the system is operational:

•ABS
•Airbag
- Blind spot monitor
-Brake system
- Coolant temperature
-Engine
•Frost
- Ignition
-Oil pressure
- Stability control (ESP).

If a warning or indicator lamp does not illuminate when the ignition is switched on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by properly trained technician.

ABS warning lamp

If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. You will continue

to have normal braking (without ABS). Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.

Airbag warning lamp

If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Have the system

checked by a properly trained technician.

Blind spot monitor indicator

It will illuminate when this feature is switched off or in conjunction with a message. See

Blind Spot Information System (page 66). See Information Messages (page 88).

Brake system lamp

It illuminates when the parking brake is engaged.

WARNING

Reduce your speed gradually and stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Use your brakes with care.

If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately.

Coolant temperature warning lamp

CAUTION

Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct. Have the system checked by properly trained technician immediately.

If it stays on after starting or illuminates when driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop

your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the coolant level. See Engine Coolant Check (page 181).

Direction indicators

Flashes during operation. A sudden increase in the rate of flashing warns of a failed

indicator bulb. See Changing a Bulb (page 54).

Engine warning lamp

If it illuminates with the engine running, this indicates a malfunction. If it flashes when

you are driving, reduce the speed of your vehicle immediately. If it continues to flash, avoid heavy acceleration or deceleration. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately.

CAUTION

If the engine warning lamp illuminates in conjunction with a message, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Forward alert indicator

It will illuminate when this feature is switched off. See Forward alert function (page

239).

Front fog lamp indicator

It will illuminate when you switch the front fog lamps on.

Frost warning lamp

WARNING

Even if the temperature rises to above 4°C (39.2°F) there is no guarantee that the road is free of ds caused by inclement weather.

It will illuminate and glow orange when the outside air temperature is between 4°C

(39.2°F) and 0°C (32°F). It will glow red when the temperature is below 0°C (32°F).

Glow plug indicator

See Starting a Diesel Engine (page 122).

Headlamp indicator

It will illuminate when you switch the headlamp low beam or the side and tail lamps on.

Ignition warning lamp

If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Switch off all

unnecessary electrical equipment. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately.

Lane departure warning indicator

It will illuminate when this feature is switched off or in conjunction with a message. The

indicator will go out when you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off. See Lane Departure Warning (page 244). See Information Messages (page 88).

Low fuel level warning lamp

If it illuminates, refuel as soon as possible.

High beam indicator

It will illuminate when you switch the headlamp main beam on. It will flash when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Message indicator

It will illuminate when a new message is stored in the information display. See

Information Messages (page 88).

Oil pressure warning lamp

CAUTION

Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately.

If it stays on after starting or illuminates when driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop

your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).

Rear fog lamp indicator

It will illuminate when you switch the rear fog lamps on.

Safety belt minder

See Belt Minder (page 213).

Shift indicator

It will illuminate to inform you that shifting to a higher gear may give better fuel economy and

lower CO2 emissions. It will not illuminate during periods of high acceleration, braking or when the clutch pedal is pressed.

Stability control (ESP) warning lamp

While driving, it flashes during activation of the system. After switching on the ignition, if it

does not illuminate or illuminates continuously while driving, this indicates a malfunction. During a malfunction, the system switches off. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.

If you switch ESP off, the warning lamp will illuminate. The lamp will go out when you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off.

Start-stop indicator

It will illuminate to inform you when the engine shuts down or in conjunction with a message.

See Using start-stop (page 224). See Information Messages (page 88).

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

Switching the chimes on and off

You can deactivate certain chimes.

To set which chimes should sound:

Close-up of a car control panel with a 'OK' button and directional arrows (no text or symbols beyond the 'OK')

E70499

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Chimes and press the right arrow button.
4. Highlight the chime and press the OK button to switch the chime on and off.
5. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Press and hold the left arrow button to return to the main menu display.

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNING

Do not operate the information display controls when the vehicle is moving.

Note: The information display will remain on for several minutes after you switch off the ignition.

Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the buttons on your steering wheel. Corresponding information is displayed in the information display.

For detailed instructions on audio, navigation, phone etc. refer to the appropriate manual.

Controls

OK

E70499

Press the up and down arrow buttons:

• to scroll through the trip computer displays

• to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu.

Press the right arrow button:

• to enter the main menu from the trip computer displays

• to enter a sub-menu.

Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.

Hold the left arrow button pressed at any time to return to the main menu display (escape button).

Note: The system will return to the trip computer displays automatically if you do not press any button for a period of time.

Press the OK button to choose and confirm a setting.

Instrument cluster functions

			Type 3Type 2Type
			XXXTrip compl
			XXXInformatio
			XXXClock setu
			XX-Display set
			XX-Park heate

Information Displays

			Type 3Type 2Type 1F
			X--Navigation cor
			X--CD control
			X--CD changer cc
			X--Radio control
			X--Phone control
			X--Auxiliary input

Type 1

Press the up and down arrow buttons on the steering wheel to scroll through the trip computer displays. See Trip Computer (page 84).

09:00 Ø 102 km/h 123456 km 234.2 km

E80604

Menu structure

graph TD
    A["BLIS"] --> B["ECO MODE"]
    B --> C["Reset trip"]
    C --> D["Information"]
    D --> E["Clock"]
    F["Gear Shifting"] --> G["Anticipation"]
    G --> H["Speed"]
    H --> I["For more Info"]
    J["Trip Odo"] --> K["Avg Fuel"]
    K --> L["Avg Speed"]
    L --> M["All values"]
    N["Messages"] --> O["Auto StartStop"]
    P["Set Clock"] --> Q["24 Hour Mode"]
    P --> R["12 Hour Mode"]

E131626

Type 2

09:00 Average Fuel 6.3 1/100km 123456 km 234.2 km E74426

Press the up and down arrow buttons on the steering wheel to scroll through the trip computer displays. See Trip Computer (page 84).

Menu structure

graph TD
    A["E131627"] --> B["ESP"]
    A --> C["BLIS"]
    A --> D["ECO MODE"]
    D --> E["Gear shifting"]
    D --> F["Anticipation"]
    D --> G["Speed"]
    D --> H["For more Info"]
    D --> I["Reset Trip"]
    I --> J["Trip Odo"]
    I --> K["Avg fuel"]
    I --> L["Avg speed"]
    I --> M["All"]
    D --> N["Information"]
    N --> O["Messages"]
    N --> P["Auto StartStop"]
    N --> Q["Tyre Press."]
    D --> R["Clock"]
    R --> S["Set Clock"]
    R --> T["24 Hour Mode"]
    R --> U["12 Hour Mode"]
    R --> V["Setup"]
    V --> W["Display"]
    V --> X["Configure"]
    W --> Y["Language"]
    X --> Y
    Y --> Z["English"]
    Y --> AA["Deutsch"]
    Y --> AB["Italiano"]
    Y --> AC["Français"]
    Y --> AD["Espanol"]
    Y --> AE["Türkçe"]
    Y --> AF["Pycский"]
    Y --> AG["Nederlands"]
    Y --> AH["Polski"]
    Y --> AI["Svenska"]
    Y --> AJ["Português"]
    Y --> AK["Metric Imperial"]

graph TD
    A["Parkheater"] --> B["Chimes"]
    A --> C["Forw Alert"]
    A --> D["Hill Launch"]
    A --> E["Tyre Pressure"]
    A --> F["Alarm"]
    A --> G["Aux. Heater"]

    B --> H["Low Fuel"]
    B --> I["General info."]
    B --> J["General warn."]
    B --> K["Home light"]

    C --> L["Low"]
    C --> M["Normal"]
    C --> N["High"]
    C --> O["Off"]

    D --> P["Off"]
    D --> Q["Auto"]
    D --> R["Manual"]

    E --> S["Check"]
    E --> T["Low load"]
    E --> U["High load"]

    F --> V["Full guard"]
    F --> W["Reduced"]
    F --> X["Ask on exit"]

    G --> Y["Time 1"]
    G --> Z["Time 2"]
    Y --> AA["Set Time"]
    Y --> AB["Monday"]
    Y --> AC["Tuesday"]
    Y --> AD["Wednesday"]
    Y --> AE["Thursday"]
    Y --> AF["Friday"]
    Y --> AG["Saturday"]
    Y --> AH["Sunday"]

    Z --> AI["Set Time"]
    Z --> AJ["Monday"]
    Z --> AK["Tuesday"]
    Z --> AL["Wednesday"]
    Z --> AM["Thursday"]
    Z --> AN["Friday"]
    Z --> AO["Saturday"]
    Z --> AP["Sunday"]

    G --> AQ["Once"]
    G --> AR["Active now"]

Type 3

325 km F1 1 0.7 km 20°C 12:50 1355.8 km 123456 km P

E88048

Use the controls to scroll through the menu displays.

Device list

The highlighted icon shows the current menu in use.

Navigation

CD

CD changer

Radio

Phone

Trip computer

Settings

Auxiliary input

Menu structure

graph TD
    A["Navigation"] --> B["CD"]
    B --> C["CD changer"]
    C --> D["Radio"]
    D --> E["Phone"]
    E --> F["Trip computer"]
    F --> G["A"]

    H["Home"] --> I["Destinat. mem. - Destinations"]
    H --> J["Destinat. A-Z - Destinations"]
    H --> K["Last destinat. - Destinations"]
    H --> L["Cancel guidan."]

    M["Folder / Tracks"] --> N["CD 1 - Folder / Tracks"]
    M --> O["CD 2 - Folder / Tracks"]
    M --> P["CD 3 - Folder / Tracks"]
    M --> Q["CD 4 - Folder / Tracks"]
    M --> R["CD 5 - Folder / Tracks"]
    M --> S["CD 6 - Folder / Tracks"]

    T["Station list"] --> U["FM 1 / FM - Stations"]
    T --> V["FM 2 - Stations"]
    T --> W["FM 3 - Stations"]
    T --> X["FM - AST - Stations"]
    T --> Y["MW / AM - Stations"]
    T --> Z["LW / AM-AST - Stations"]

    AA["Phone book"] --> AB["Redial - Numbers"]
    AA --> AC["Incoming calls - Numbers"]
    AA --> AD["Outgoing calls - Numbers"]
    AA --> AE["Call status"]

    AF["Distance to empty"] --> AG["Average fuel"]
    AF --> AH["Average speed"]
    AF --> AI["Reset selected element"]
    AF --> AJ["Reset trip odometer"]

    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

graph TD
    A["A"] --> B["Settings"]
    B --> C1["ESP"]
    C1 --> C2["BLIS"]
    C1 --> C3["ECOMODE"]
    C3 --> C4["Gear shifting"]
    C4 --> C5["Anticipation"]
    C4 --> C6["Speed"]
    C4 --> C7["More info"]
    B --> D1["Information"]
    D1 --> D2["Messages"]
    D1 --> D3["Driver alert"]
    D1 --> D4["Auto StartStop"]
    D1 --> D5["Tyre Pressure"]
    D1 --> D6["Coolant temperature"]
    B --> E1["Clock"]
    E1 --> E2["Set Clock"]
    E1 --> E3["24-hour mode"]
    E1 --> E4["12-hour mode"]
    B --> F1["Setup"]
    F1 --> F2["Driver alert"]
    F1 --> F3["Display"]
    F3 --> F4["Colour themes"]
    F3 --> F5["Configure"]
    F5 --> F6["Help Screen"]
    F5 --> F7["NAV info"]
    F7 --> F8["Always off"]
    F7 --> F9["On guidance"]
    F7 --> F10["Always on"]
    F3 --> G1["Language"]
    G1 --> G2["English"]
    G1 --> G3["Deutsch"]
    G1 --> G4["Italiano"]
    G1 --> G5["Français"]
    G1 --> G6["Espanol"]
    G1 --> G7["Türkçe"]
    G1 --> G8["Pycский"]
    G1 --> G9["Nederlands"]
    G1 --> G10["Polski"]
    G1 --> G11["Svenska"]
    G1 --> G12["Português"]
    G3 --> H["Metric Imperial"]

graph TD
    A["Chimes"] --> B["Low Fuel"]
    A --> C["General info."]
    A --> D["General warn."]
    A --> E["Home light"]
    F["Forw Alert"] --> G["Low"]
    F --> H["Normal"]
    F --> I["High"]
    F --> J["Off"]
    K["Lane depart"] --> L["Sensitivity"]
    K --> M["Intensity"]
    N["Auto beam"] --> O["On"]
    N --> P["Sensitivity"]
    Q["Hill Launch"] --> R["Off"]
    Q --> S["Auto"]
    Q --> T["Manual"]
    U["Tyre Pressure"] --> V["Check"]
    U --> W["Low load"]
    U --> X["High load"]
    Y["Alarm"] --> Z["Full guard"]
    Y --> AA["Reduced"]
    Y --> AB["Ask on exit"]
    AC["Aux Heater"] --> AD["End"]

E131630

graph TD
    A["A"] --> B["B"]
    B --> C["Auxiliary input"]
    D["Time 1"] --> E["Set Time"]
    D --> F["Monday"]
    D --> G["Tuesday"]
    D --> H["Wednesday"]
    D --> I["Thursday"]
    D --> J["Friday"]
    D --> K["Saturday"]
    D --> L["Sunday"]
    M["Time 2"] --> N["Set Time"]
    M --> O["Monday"]
    M --> P["Tuesday"]
    M --> Q["Wednesday"]
    M --> R["Thursday"]
    M --> S["Friday"]
    M --> T["Saturday"]
    M --> U["Sunday"]
    V["Once"] --> W["Active now"]

TRIP COMPUTER

Odometer

Registers the total mileage of the vehicle.

Tripmeter

Registers the mileage of individual journeys.

Distance to empty

Indicates the approximate distance the vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern may cause the value to vary.

Average fuel consumption

Indicates the average fuel consumption since the function was last reset.

Average speed

Indicates the average speed calculated since the function was last reset.

Outside air temperature

Shows the outside air temperature.

Type 1 and 2

10:20 Average Fuel 6.3 1/100km 123456 km 234.2 km E74428 A B C

A. Trip computer
B. Odometer
C. Tripmeter

The trip computer includes the following information displays:

graph TD
    A["Average fuel"] --> B["Average speed"]
    B --> C["Outside air"]
    C --> D["Reset Trip"]
    D --> E["Dist. to empty"]

E74441

Press the up and down arrow buttons on the steering wheel to scroll through the trip computer displays.

Note: The position of the trip computer display may vary depending on the information shown in the display.

Resetting the trip computer using the main menu

To reset a particular display:

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Reset Trip with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight the function to be reset.
4. Press the right arrow button to select the function.
5. Hold the OK button pressed.

To reset all three displays, select All values and hold the OK button pressed.

Type 3

325 km FN1 0.7 km 12:58 1355.8 km P 123456 km E88049

Trip computerA

Press the OK button on the steering wheel to cycle through the different trip computer displays. To reset a value, press and hold the OK button.

Resetting the trip computer using the main menu

To reset a particular display:

1. Highlight Trip Computer with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.

2. Highlight the function to be reset.

3. Hold the OK button pressed.

PERSONALIZED SETTINGS

The following information is displayed in the information display if you have selected it:

Help screen, radio, navigation and phone information

The help screen appears for a few seconds when you switch the ignition on.

If the radio, navigation or telephone is operating, information relating to this system is displayed in the information display.

To select which information is displayed in the information display:

Type 1 and 2

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button.
4. Highlight Configure and press the right arrow button.
5. To toggle the Help screen, Radio Info and Phone Info on and off, highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting.
6. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display.

Type 3

1. Highlight Settings with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.

2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.

3. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button.
4. Highlight Configure and press the right arrow button.
5. To toggle the Help screen and NAV Info on and off, highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting.

Navigation information

You can also choose when the navigation information is displayed in the information display. Three options are available:

·Always off: No navigation information is displayed in the information display.
- On guidance: The navigation information will only appear when the navigation system provides a guidance instruction. This function is only available on certain navigation systems.
- Always on: Navigation information will always appear in the information display when the navigation system is operating.

To set when navigation information should be displayed:

Type 1 and 2

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button.
4. Highlight Configure and press the right arrow button.

5. Highlight Nav Info and press the right arrow button.

6. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting.

7. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display.

Type 3

1. Highlight Settings with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button.
4. Highlight Configure and press the right arrow button.
5. Highlight Nav Info and press the right arrow button.
6. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting.

Language

A choice of eleven languages are available:

English, German, Italian, French, Spanish, Turkish, Russian, Dutch, Polish, Swedish and Portuguese.

Type 1 and 2

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button.
4. Highlight Language and press the right arrow button.

5. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting.

6. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display.

Type 3

1. Highlight Settings with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button.
4. Highlight Language and press the right arrow button.
5. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting.

Units of measure

Note: The outside air temperature is only displayed in degrees Celsius and cannot be set to degrees Fahrenheit.

To select metric or imperial units:

Type 1 and 2

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button.
4. Highlight Measure Unit and press the right arrow button.
5. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting.
6. Press the left arrow button to return to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display.

Type 3

1. Highlight Settings with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Display and press the right arrow button.
4. Highlight Measure Unit and press the right arrow button.
5. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting.

INFORMATION MESSAGES

OK

E70499

Press OK to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. Other messages will be removed automatically after a short time.

With instrument cluster type 3, certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus.

Message indicator

The message indicator illuminates to supplement some messages. It will be red or amber

depending on the severity of the message and will remain on until the cause of the message has been rectified.

Message symbols

See Owner's Manual.

Have the system checked at the next service.

Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Viewing current messages

Type 1 and 2

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Information with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Messages and press the right arrow button.
4. Use the up and down buttons to view the current messages.

Type 3

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Settings with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.

Information Displays

1. Highlight Information with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.

2. Highlight Messages and press the right arrow button.

3. Use the up and down buttons to view the current messages.

Active suspension

		ActionIndicatorMessage
	amberIVDC	method system checked by a properly trained technician.
		See Active suspension (page 230).-IVDC
		See Active suspension (page 230).-IVDC
		See Active suspension (page 230).-IVDC

Airbag

		ActionIndicatorMessage
	amberAirbag	Have function system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.

Alarm

		ActionIndicatorMessage
		See Alarm (page 216).amberAlarm trigger
service reqd.	-Alarm system have the system checked by a properly trained technician.

Automatic high beam control, Lane departure warning and Driver alert

		ActionIndicatorMessage
Rest now		Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.red Driver
Front camera Clean screen	amber	The front camera sensor has reduced visibility. Clean the windshield.
Front camera malfunction	amber	The front camera sensor has malfunctioned. Have this checked as soon as possible.

Information Displays

		ActionIndicatorMessage
not available	amberFront	Time affected systems are temporarily unavailable, and should resume after a few minutes.
Rest suggested		Take a rest break soon.amberDriver
warn.malfunct.	amberLane	department system has malfunctioned. Have this checked as soon as possible.

fatigue

Battery and charging system

		ActionIndicatorMessage
Overvoltage: Stop safely!	red	Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off the ignition. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.
	amberLow battery the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.

Blind spot monitor

		ActionIndicatorMessage
BLIS sensor blocked	amber	See Blind Spot Information System (page 66).
BLIS right sensor malfunction	amber	Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.
BLIS left sensor malfunction	amber	Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.
	amberBLIS malfunction	Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.
BLIS inactive Trailer attach'd	amber	See Blind Spot Information System (page 66).

Child power lock

		ActionIndicatorMessage
Child lock malfunction	amber	Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.

Climate control

		ActionIndicatorMessage
		SeeAuxiliary Heater(page 104).amberA

Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

		ActionIndicatorMessage
	amberACC	malfvethersystem checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.
Clean radar sensor	amber	See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 234).
malfunction	amberForward	Aler the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.
active		See Cruise Control (page 140).-Cruise c
standby		See Cruise Control (page 140).-Cruise c
ACC unavailable	-	See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 234).

Doors open

		ActionIndicatorMessage
	redDriver	Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and close.
open	redDriver	Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and close.
open	redPassenger	Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and close.

Information Displays

		ActionIndicatorMessage
door open	redPassenger vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and close.
open	redLuggage vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and close.
	redBonnet vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and close. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 169).

Engine immobilizer

		ActionIndicatorMessage
		SeeEngine immobilizer(page 215).amberImmobil

Hill start assist

		ActionIndicatorMessage
available	amberHill La	unventor system checked by a properly trained technician.
brake !		See Hill Start Assist (page 227).amberPlease us
active		See Hill Start Assist (page 227).-Hill Launch Ass
off		See Hill Start Assist (page 227).-Hill Launch Ass

Keyless system

		ActionIndicatorMessage
tion		Have this checked as soon as possible.redSteering rr
Key not detected	amber	See Keyless Entry(page 34).
Car operative Press STOP	amber	The engine is still running. Switch the ignition off.See Keyless Starting(page 118).

Information Displays

		ActionIndicatorMessage
		See Keyless Entry(page 34).amberKey outs
	amberKey battery lock	See Changing the remote control battery(page 29).
Retry		See Steering Wheel Lock(page 120).-Steering lo

Lighting

		ActionIndicatorMessage
malfunction	amberFront light the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.
fault	-Low beam Obel or both of the headlamp low beam bulbs have blown. Check the headlamp low beam bulbs. See Changing a Bulb (page 54).
fault	-Rear fog light One Bulb both of the rear fog lamp bulbs have blown. Check the rear fog lamp bulbs. See Changing a Bulb (page 54).
fault	-Stop lamp One Bulb both of the brake lamp bulbs have blown. Check the brake lamp bulbs. See Changing a Bulb (page 54).
fault	-Trailer stop One Bulb both of the brake lamp bulbs on your trailer have blown. Check the brake lamp bulbs on your trailer.
fault	-Trailer turn One Bulb both of the direction indicator bulbs on your trailer have blown. Check the direction indicator bulbs on your trailer.

Maintenance

		ActionIndicatorMessage
	redEngine	malfunction system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.
level		SeeEngine Oil Check(page 181).amberCheck eng
fuel	amberWater	detected system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.
level		SeeWasher Fluid Check(page 183).-Low washer f
	-Service	oilHave the system checked by a properly trained technician.

Occupant protection

		ActionIndicatorMessage
	-Crash mobile	Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.

Parking brake

		ActionIndicatorMessage
		See Parking Brake (page 136).redPark brake app
Park brake applied	amber	See Parking Brake (page 136).

Power steering

		ActionIndicatorMessage
malfunction	amberPower	Fststeering will be maintained but you will need to exert greater force on the steering wheel. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.

Stability control (ESP)

		ActionIndicatorMessage
	-ESP mal	have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.
		See Using Stability Control (page 137).-ESP

Start-stop

Message	Message indicator	Action
Auto StartStop Switch ign off	red	Switch the ignition off before leaving the vehicle if the system has shut down the engine. See Using start-stop (page 224).
Auto StartStop Press clutch	-	The engine needs to be restarted, press the clutch pedal to start. See Using start-stop (page 224).
Auto StartStop Select neutral	-	Select neutral for the system to restart the engine. See Using start-stop (page 224).
StartStop: Man. start required	-	The system is not functioning. A manual restart is required.

Transmission

		ActionIndicatorMessage
malfunction	redTransmissive the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately.
temperatur	amberTransmissive the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.

Tire pressure monitoring system

		ActionIndicatorMessage
	redCheck	...The tire indicated has continued to deflate. Check the tire and inflate it to the recommended pressure. SeeTechnical Specifications(page 199).
sures	redCheck	type presmore of the tires are significantly under-inflated. This message may be displayed after a new sensor has been installed. Check the tires and inflate them to the recommended pressure.SeeTechnical Specifications(page 199).
	amberCheck	The tire indicated is significantly under-inflated. Check the tire and inflate it to the recommended pressure. SeeTechnical Specifications(page 199).
malfunction	amberTyre	monitors have installed a temporary spare wheel. Install a correctly inflated full size wheel with a sensor as soon as possible. When a malfunction occurs, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure.
		Up to three sensors have malfunctioned, an unapproved accessory is interfering with the system or a general malfunction has been detected. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible. When a malfunction occurs, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure.
speed	amberInflate	Tires for high pressures are not suitable for driving at 160 km/h (100 mph). Inflate the tires to the recommended pressure. SeeTechnical Specifications(page 199). This message will be displayed for only a few seconds with a low tire pressure warning.
detected	-Tyre sens	you have installed wheels and tires that do not have sensors. The tire pressures will not be monitored.
		All sensors have malfunctioned or an unapproved accessory is interfering with the system. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as possible.

Voice control

		ActionIndicatorMessage
Please speak		See Voice control (page 281).-Voice control
recognised		See Voice control (page 281).-Voice control
allowed		See Voice control (page 281).-Voice control

Keep the air intakes forward of the windshield free from obstruction (snow, leaves etc.) to allow the climate control system to function effectively.

Recirculated air

CAUTION

Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to mist up. If the windows mist up, follow the settings for defrosting and demisting the windshield.

The air currently in the passenger compartment will be recirculated. Outside air will not enter the vehicle.

Heating

Heating performance depends on the temperature of the engine coolant.

Air conditioning

Note: The air conditioning operates only when the temperature is above 4^ C ( 39^ F).

Note: If you use the air conditioning, the fuel consumption of your vehicle will be higher.

Air is directed through the evaporator where it is cooled. Humidity is extracted from the air to help keep the windows free of mist. The resulting condensation is directed to the outside of the vehicle and it is therefore normal if you see a small pool of water under your vehicle.

General information on controlling the interior climate

Fully close all the windows.

Warming the interior

Direct the air towards your feet. In cold or humid weather conditions, direct some of the air towards the windshield and the door windows.

Cooling the interior

Direct the air towards your face.

AIR VENTS

Front air vents

Close-up of a circular mechanical component with a paper airplane icon and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Rear air vents

A B E89129

OpenA

CloseB

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL

Air distribution control

A F B E C D E71379

WindshieldA

Footwell and windshieldB

FootwellC

Face level and footwellD

Face levelE

Face level and windshieldF

You can set the air distribution control to any position between the symbols.

Blower

A 0 1 2 3 4

E75470
A Off

Note: If you switch the blower off, the windshield may mist up.

Recirculated air

Press the button to toggle between outside air and recirculated air.

Heating the interior quickly

Three industrial control knobs with purple rotary buttons and labeled terminals (no readable text or symbols)

E71377

Ventilation

Three circular industrial control knobs with numeric labels and indicator lights, no readable text or symbols beyond controls.

E71378

Set the air distribution control, blower and air vents to suit your requirements.

Air conditioning

Switching the air conditioning on and off

A/C

If you turn the blower off, the air conditioning will turn off. When you turn the blower on again, the air conditioning will come on automatically.

Cooling with outside air

Close-up of a three rotary dial with labeled controls and an arrow pointing to the rightmost dial (no text or symbols on the dial itself)

E71380

Cooling the interior quickly

Diagram showing three car air conditioners with labeled controls and directional arrows indicating changes.

E71381

Defrosting and demisting the windshield

Note: Turn the air conditioning on to assist windshield and side window demisting.

Note: Turn the heater control to maximum heat to assist windshield and side window defrosting.

0 1 2 3 4 AC AC

E71382

Make sure that the blower and A/C is on. The indicator in the switch will illuminate during defrosting and demisting.

If you move the air distribution control to a position other than A, the A/C will remain on.

You can switch the air conditioning and recirculated air on and off while the air distribution control is set to position A.

If necessary, switch the heated windows on. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 103).

Reducing interior air humidity

0 1 2 3 4 A/C

E71383

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

AUTO MAX MONO 22.0 °C 22.0 °C A/C ON 0000000 A OFF AUTO MONO

E91390

The system controls the temperature, amount and distribution of the air flow automatically and adjusts them according to the driving and weather conditions. Pressing the AUTO button once switches on the auto mode.

The system in your vehicle is dual-zone automatic climate control. When the system is in mono mode, all the temperature zones are linked to the driver's zone. When you switch mono mode off, the dual-zone system allows you to set different temperatures for the driver's and front passenger's side.

Note: Avoid adjusting the settings when the vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold. The automatic climate control adjusts to the current circumstances automatically. For the system to function properly, the side and center vents should be fully open.

Note: The sunload sensor is located on top of the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor with any objects.

Note: At low outside temperatures, when the system is in auto mode, the air stream will be directed to the windshield and the side windows as long as the engine is cold.

Note: For information on the automatic climate control, on vehicles fitted with a combined Navigation and automatic climate control system, see separate handbook.

Setting the temperature

E91391

You can set the temperature between 15.5°C (60°F) and 29.5°C (85°F) in steps of 0.5°C (1°F). In position LO, 15°C (59°F), the system will switch to permanent cooling. In position HI, 30°C (86°F), the system will switch to permanent heating.

Note: If either position LO or HI is selected, the system will not regulate a stable temperature.

Mono mode

In mono mode, the temperature settings for both the driver's and passenger's side are linked. If you adjust the temperature using the rotary control on the driver's side, the settings will be adjusted to the same setting on the passenger's side. In mono mode, MONO appears in the display.

To switch mono mode off

Select a temperature for the passenger's side with the rotary control on the passenger's side. Mono mode will switch off and MONO disappears from the display. The temperature for the driver's side will remain unchanged. You can now adjust the driver and passenger side temperatures independently of each another. The temperature settings for each side are shown in the display. You can set a temperature difference of up to 4°C (8°F).

Note: If you set a temperature difference of greater than 4^ C ( 8^ F), the temperature on the other side will be adjusted so that the difference remains 4^ C ( 8^ F).

Note: If you set one of the sides to HI or LO, both sides will be set to HI or LO.

To switch mono mode back on

MONO

To switch mono mode back on, press the MONO button.

MONO reappears in the display

and the passenger's side temperature will be adjusted to the driver's side temperature.

Blower

Use the buttons to adjust the blower speed.

The blower setting is indicated in the display.

To return to auto mode, press the AUTO button.

Air distribution

To adjust air distribution, press the desired button. Any combination of settings can be selected simultaneously.

E70308

FootwellA

Face levelB

WindshieldC

When you select windshield defrosting and demisting, A, B and C switch off automatically and the air conditioning switches on. Outside air will flow into the vehicle. You cannot select recirculated air.

Windshield defrosting and demisting

Press the windshield defrosting and demisting button. Outside air will flow into the vehicle. Air

conditioning is automatically selected. As long as the air distribution is set to this position, you cannot select recirculated air.

The blower speed and the temperature control operate automatically and cannot be adjusted manually. The blower is set to high speed and the temperature to HI.

When you select windshield defrosting and demisting, the heated screens switch on automatically and switch off after a short time.

To return to auto mode, press the AUTO button.

Switching the air conditioning on and off

Press the A/C button to switch the air conditioning on and off. A/COFF appears in the display

when the air conditioning is switched off.

A/C ON appears in the display when the air conditioning is switched on.

Recirculated air

Press the recirculated air button to toggle between outside air and recirculated air.

Note: When the system is in auto mode and the interior and exterior temperatures are quite hot, the system selects recirculated air automatically to maximize cooling of the interior. Once the selected temperature is reached, the system will reselect outside air automatically.

Switching off the automatic climate control

Press the OFF button.

When switched off, the heating, ventilation and air conditioning system is switched off and recirculated air is selected.

HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS

Heated windows

Use the heated windows to defrost or demist the windshield or rear window.

Note: The heated windows operate only when the engine is running.

Heated windshield

Heated rear window

Heated exterior mirrors

Electric exterior mirrors are fitted with a heating element that will defrost or demist the mirror glass. They will switch on automatically when you switch the heated rear window on.

AUXILIARY HEATER

Parking heater

WARNING

The parking heater must not be operated at filling stations, near sources of combustible vapors or in enclosed spaces.

The parking heater operates independently of the vehicle heater by heating the engine's coolant circuit. It is fed from the vehicle fuel tank. You can also use it while the vehicle is in motion to help the vehicle heater warm up the interior more quickly.

Used properly, the parking heater provides the following benefits:

• It preheats the interior of the vehicle.
• It keeps the windows clear of ice in the event of frost and prevents condensation.
• It avoids cold starts and allows the engine to reach operating temperature sooner.

Note: The parking heater will only operate if there is at least 7.5 liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel in the fuel tank and the ambient temperature is below 15^ C ( 59^ F). The heater will not operate if the battery is low.

Note: The heating depends on the outside air temperature.

Note: When the parking heater is activated, exhaust fumes may come from under the sides of the vehicle. This is normal.

Note: On vehicles with a manual heating, ventilation and air conditioning system, the heating of the vehicle interior is dependent on the temperature, air distribution and blower control settings.

To prevent the battery from discharging:

• Once the parking heater has performed one heating cycle, the next programmed heating cycle will only be carried out if you have started the vehicle's engine in between.
  • After a heating cycle, drive the vehicle for at least the period of the heating cycle.

Program the parking heater

Note: The programmed time is the time at which you wish the vehicle to be warm and ready to drive, not the time at which the heater switches on.

Note: You must program the times at least 70 minutes in advance of the time you wish to set.

Note: You must set the time and date correctly. See Clock (page 219).

To program the heating times:

OK

E70499

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Park Heater and press the right arrow button.

Park Heater Program 1 > Program 2 > One-Time > Active now >

E74467

• The functions Program 1 and

Program 2 allow you to program up to two heating cycles for each day of the week. These times will remain stored and the heater will warm up the vehicle at these times on these days every week.

•The function One-Time allows you to program one heating cycle for one specific day.

• The function Active now

automatically switches on the heater.

Programming the functions Program 1 and Program 2

Time 1 [07:55] > □Monday □Tuesday □Wednesday □Thursday □Friday

E74468

1. Highlight Program1 and press the right arrow button.

2. Highlight the day on which the heater should warm up the vehicle.

3. Press the OK button to confirm the selection. A cross appears in the box next to the day to show that this day is selected.

4. Continue in the same way to select all the days on which the heater should warm up the vehicle.

5. To set the time at which the vehicle should be warmed up, highlight the time at the top of the display and press the right arrow button.

6. Press the OK button and the hours flash. Use the up and down arrow buttons to adjust the individual settings and the left and right arrow buttons to move to the next or previous setting.

7. When you have finished, press the OK button again to confirm the selection.

Parkheater Program 1 07:55 01:12:2006 OK = change

E74469

You can use the function Program 2 to set a second cycle, for example different times on different days or twice on the same day. The programming procedure is the same as for the function Program 1.

Programming the function One-Time

1. Highlight One-Time and press the right arrow button.
2. Press the OK button and the hours flash. Use the up and down arrow buttons to adjust the individual settings and the left and right arrow buttons to move to the next or previous setting.
3. When you have finished, press the OK button again to confirm the selection.

Active now

Highlight Active now and press the OK button. A cross appears in the box next to the function to show that the heater is activated.

To deactivate the heater, highlight Active now and press the OK button again.

Remote starting

The parking heater may be started and switched off from a distance of up to 500 meters (1640 feet) using the supplied remote control transmitter. This range will vary depending upon local conditions and terrain, as well as battery condition. The remote control transmitter will indicate whether or not the signal has been received. The parking heater will operate for a maximum of 30 minutes.

Note: The heater will operate, depending on the ambient temperature, for between 10 and 30 minutes. The interior will cool down after the heating period has elapsed, therefore a remote start more than 30 minutes before driving is not recommended.

Note: The remote control may not always receive confirmation of a successful remote command at extended operating ranges.

Starting

Hold the transmitter with the antenna upwards and press the ON button for at least two seconds. The LED on the transmitter lights up green to confirm the signal has been received.

Switching off

Hold the transmitter with the antenna upwards and press the OFF button for at least two seconds. The LED on the transmitter lights up red to confirm the signal has been received.

Remote start in combination with direct start or timer

Close-up of a black remote control with purple buttons labeled 'ON' and 'OFF' (no additional text or symbols)

E114360

Remote start is integrated with normal heater control. Parking heaters started with direct start or timer functions can be switched off with the remote control transmitter and vice versa.

Feedback during starting and switching off

The LED on the transmitter illuminates green for about two seconds. This indicates the signal has been received by the vehicle and the heater has started.

The LED on the transmitter illuminates red for about two seconds. This indicates the signal has been received by the vehicle and the heater has switched off.

The LED on the transmitter flashes green or red for about two seconds. This indicates the signal was not transmitted correctly. Repeat the transmission.

The LED on the transmitter illuminates orange for about two seconds before showing green or red. This indicates the transmitter batteries are weak and should be changed.

The LED on the transmitter flashes orange for about 5 seconds. This indicates that the signal was not transmitted. The transmitter batteries are discharged and should be changed as soon as possible.

Changing the remote control battery

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority regarding recycling.

1 2

E114361

1. Insert a screwdriver or other suitable tool into the slot on the back of the remote control, and unscrew the compartment cover.

CAUTION

Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver.

1. Carefully prise out the battery.

2. Install a new battery (3.3V type CR1-3N) with the + facing upwards.

3. Re-assemble the remote control.

Programming the transmitter

Further transmitters may be used with the remote system, please consult your dealer. Up to a maximum of 3 separate remote controls may be added. When adding extra transmitters these must be programmed separately.

Note: The heater must be switched off during programming.

Note: The programming procedure may be repeated as often as is required. The oldest programmed transmitter will be deleted each time.

1. Install the battery in the new transmitter.
2. Turn off the power to the receiver by removing fuse F32 from the engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 159).
3. Wait for at least 5 seconds.
4. Reconnect power to the receiver by replacing the fuse, and press the OFF button on the new transmitter within 5 seconds until the LED light turns off.
5. The new transmitter is now programmed.

Fuel operated heater (depending on country)

WARNING

The fuel operated heater must not be operated at filling stations, near sources of combustible vapors or in enclosed spaces.

The fuel operated heater aids in warming the engine and the vehicle interior on vehicles with a diesel engine. It is switched on or off automatically depending on the outside air temperature and the coolant temperature, unless you have deactivated it. When the fuel operated heater is operating, Aux. Heater on is displayed in the information display. See Information Displays (page 75).

To deactivate the fuel operated heater:

OK E70499

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Aux. Heater and press the OK button to toggle the heater on and off. A cross appears in the box when the heater is activated.
4. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display.

Diesel auxiliary heater (depending on country)

The diesel auxiliary heater (PTC electrical heater) aids in warming the vehicle interior on vehicles with a diesel engine. It is switched on or off automatically depending on the outside air temperature, the coolant temperature and the alternator load.

POWER MOON ROOF

WARNING

Before operating the power moonroof you should verify it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the moonroof opening. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury. It is the primary responsibility of the supervising adults to never leave a child unattended in a vehicle and to never leave the keys in an unattended vehicle.

Note: When the switches are operated often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain time to prevent damage due to overheating.

Note: The power moonroof can also be operated with the ignition off via the global opening and global closing function. See Global Opening and Closing (page 37).

There are two ways of opening the moonroof – the rear of the moonroof lifts open or the moonroof opens from the front, sliding back under the roof. The moonroof opens and closes whilst the switch is pressed.

Switch on the ignition to operate the power moonroof.

The power moonroof is operated by a switch located between the sun visors.

Opening and closing the moonroof

Close-up of a car wheel rim with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

E72188

Tilting the moonroof

Close-up of a car's side panel with an upward arrow and downward arrow indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

E72189

Opening and closing the moonroof automatically

Note: When opening automatically, the moonroof will stop about 8 cm from the fully opened position. This position reduces the buffeting noise which is sometimes heard when the moonroof is fully open. The moonroof will only stop automatically in this position when the moonroof is opened automatically.

To open or close the moonroof automatically press either side of the switch to the second action point and release it completely. Press again to stop.

When the closed position is reached, the moonroof stops automatically.

Moonroof anti-trap protection

WARNINGS

The anti-trap function is deactivated until the memory has been reset.

Careless closing of the window can cause injuries.

Careless closing of the power moonroof can override the anti-trap protection and cause injuries.

The moonroof will stop automatically while closing and reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way.

To override anti-trap protection when there is a resistance, e. g. in the winter, proceed as follows:

WARNING

While the moonroof is being closed for the third time, the anti-trap

function is disabled. Make sure there are no obstacles in the way of the closing moonroof.

Close the moonroof a third time to the resistance. The anti-trap function is disabled and the moonroof cannot be closed automatically. The moonroof will override the resistance and can then be closed fully.

If the moonroof does not close after the third attempt, have it checked by an expert.

Moonroof safety mode

WARNING

The anti-trap function is not active during this procedure. Make sure that there are no obstacles in the way of losing moonroof.

If the system detects a malfunction, it enters a safety mode. The moonroof will move for only about 0.5 seconds at a time and then stop again. Close the moonroof by pressing the button again when the moonroof stops moving. When the rear of the moonroof is lifted, lift the rear all the way and then close the moonroof. Have the system checked by an expert immediately.

Moonroof relearning

WARNING

The anti-trap function is not active during this procedure. Make sure that there are no obstacles in the way of losing moonroof.

In case the moonroof no longer closes properly, follow this relearning procedure:

• Tilt the rear of the moonroof as far as possible. Release the button.
• Press and hold the same button again for 30 seconds until you see the moonroof move.
• Release the button and immediately press and hold it again. The moonroof will close, open fully and then close again. Do not release the button before the moonroof has reached the closed position for the second time.

If the button is not pressed continuously, the relearning function will be interrupted. Start the procedure once more from the beginning.

SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION

Max. 30° E68595

WARNINGS

Do not adjust the seats when the vehicle is moving.

Only when you use the safety belt properly, can it hold you in a position that allows the airbag to achieve its hum effect.

When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a collision. We recommend that you:

-sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible.

-do not recline the seatback more than 30 degrees.

- adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forwards as possible, remaining comfortable.

- keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 250 millimeters (10 inches) between your breastbone and the airbag cover.

- hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.

•bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
- position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.

Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Adjusting the head restraint

WARNINGS

Raise the rear head restraint when the rear seat is occupied by a passenger.

When using a forward facing child restraint on a rear seat, always remove the head restraint from that

seat.

Car seat assembly diagram showing left side of seat and rear side of seat with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forwards as possible, remaining comfortable.

Removing the head restraint

Press the locking buttons and remove the head restraint.

MANUAL SEATS

Moving the seats backwards and forwards

Diagram of a car seat assembly with inset views showing seat loading and fastening mechanism (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Rock the seat backwards and forwards after releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged in tch.

Adjusting the lumbar support

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with no text or symbols

Adjusting the height of the driver's seat

Diagram of a car seat with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Adjusting the angle of the seatback

Car seat assembly diagram showing valve insertion and adjustment mechanism (no text or symbols)

POWER SEATS
2-way power seat

1 2 E70733 1 2

8-way power seat

E70734

REAR SEATS

WARNINGS

When folding the seatbacks down, take care not to get your fingers caught between the seatback and seat frame.

Make sure that the seats and the seatbacks are secure and fully engaged in their catches.

Folding the seatbacks down

CAUTION

Lower the head restraints.

Diagram of a car backseat with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or change.

E86611

1. Press the unlock buttons down and hold them there.
2. Push the seatback forwards.

Creating a level load floor

WARNING

Make sure the red indicator is not showing when you engage the seat in the catches.

CAUTION

Lower the head restraints.

1 2 3 2

E86612

1. Insert your fingers between the seat cushion and seatback and fold the seat cushion forwards.
2. Press the unlock buttons down and hold them there.
3. Push the seatback forwards.

Folding the seatbacks up

WARNING

When folding the seatbacks up, make sure that the belts are visible to an occupant and not caught behind the seat.

HEATED SEATS

Note: Operating this function with the engine off will drain the battery.

3D rendered image of a car seat with black seating and white seat cover (no text or symbols)

E70601

Close-up of a black calculator with icons and arrows pointing to function buttons (no readable text or symbols)

E71224

Note: The number of illuminated lights beside the button indicates the selected step.

Note: The heater setting is indicated in red.

Note: When no light is illuminated, the heating is switched off.

Note: Only the front seat settings are stored when you switch off the ignition.

Raising and Lowering the Temperature

Press and hold the relevant button or press it repeatedly to select the desired temperature.

VENTILATED SEATS

Note: Operating this function with the engine off will drain the battery.

3D rendered image of a car seat with black and white panels, no text or symbols visible

E70601

Close-up of a black calculator with icons and arrows pointing to the keys (no readable text or symbols)

E70602

Note: The number of illuminated lights beside the button indicates the selected step.

Note: The ventilation setting is indicated in blue.

Note: When no light is illuminated, the ventilation is switched off.

Note: The settings are stored when the ignition is switched off.

Note: When the seat is being ventilated, the heater may switch on automatically. This is to prevent the flow of air becoming uncomfortably cool.

Note: The air in the vehicle interior is used to ventilate the seats. The cooling effect therefore depends on the temperature of the vehicle interior. Switch on the air conditioning if necessary and set the air distribution to footwell. See Climate Control (page 98).

Raising and Lowering the Temperature

Press and hold the relevant button or press it repeatedly to select the desired temperature.

GENERAL INFORMATION

General points on starting

If the battery has been disconnected the vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approx. 8 kilometers (5 miles) after reconnecting the battery.

This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. Any unusual driving characteristics during this period may be disregarded.

Starting the engine by towing or pushing

WARNING

To prevent damage you must not push or tow start your vehicle. Use booster cables and a booster battery.

See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 248).

IGNITION SWITCH

WARNING

Never return the key to position 0 or 1 when the vehicle is in motion.

Two grayscale automotive key components: a circular dial with indicator lights and a rectangular key with a logo (no text or symbols visible)

E72128

- The ignition is off.

I The ignition and all main electrical circuits are disabled.

Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long to avoid discharging the battery.

II The ignition is switched on. All electrical circuits are operational. Warning lamps and indicators illuminate. This is the key position when driving. You must also select it when being towed.

III The starter motor is activated. Release the key as soon as the engine starts.

KEYLESS STARTING

WARNINGS

The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as cell phones.

Always check that the steering wheel lock is deactivated before attempting to move your vehicle. See Steering Wheel Lock (page 120).

Note: The ignition may automatically switch off after a period of time if your vehicle has been left unattended with the ignition on. This is to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging.

Note: A valid passive key must be located inside the vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine.

Note: To start your engine you must also fully depress the brake or clutch pedal, depending on the transmission fitted.

Close-up of a Ford Power brand tire with black and white design (no additional text or symbols)

E85766

Ignition on

Press the button once. All electrical circuits are operational, warning lamps and indicators illuminate.

Starting with manual transmission

Note: Releasing the clutch pedal during engine start will stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on.

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Briefly press the button.
3. If the engine does not start, fully depress the brake and clutch pedals.

Starting with automatic transmission

Note: Releasing the brake pedal during engine start will stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on.

1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. Briefly press the button.

Starting a diesel engine

Note: Engine cranking may not commence until the engine glow plug cycle has been completed. This may take several seconds in extremely cold conditions.

Note: Continue to press the clutch or brake pedal until engine cranking begins.

Failure to start

The passive starting system will not function if:

• The passive key frequencies are jammed.
  •The passive key battery is flat.

If you are unable to start your vehicle carry out the following procedure.

Type 1

Close-up of a black plastic device with three slots, inserted into a circular opening (no text or symbols visible)

E87382

1. Hold the key next to the steering column shroud exactly as shown.
2. With the key in this position you can use the button to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle.

Type 2

Close-up of a metallic mechanical component with a circular hole and an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols)

E87381

1. Carefully prise out the cover.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a circular feature (no text or symbols visible)

E85767

1. Insert the key into the key holder.

Close-up of a Ford Power car wheel with logo (no additional text or symbols visible)

E85766

1. With the key in this position you can press the button to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle.

Stopping the engine with the vehicle stationary

Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits, warning lamps and indicators will be switched off.

Manual transmission

Briefly press the button.

Automatic transmission

1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P.

2. Briefly press the button.

Stopping the engine when the vehicle is moving

WARNING

Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The steering will not be locked, but higher effort will be required. When the ignition is switched off some electrical circuits, warning lamps and indicators may also be OFF.

Press and hold the button for two seconds, or press three times within three seconds.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK

WARNING

Always check that the steering is unlocked before attempting to move your vehicle.

Vehicles without keyless starting

To activate the steering wheel lock;

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Turn the steering wheel.

Vehicles with keyless starting

Note: The steering wheel lock will not activate when the ignition is on or the vehicle is moving.

Your vehicle has an electronically controlled steering wheel lock. This operates automatically.

The steering wheel lock will activate after a short period of time once you have parked your vehicle and the passive key is outside of the vehicle.

Deactivating the steering wheel lock

Switch the ignition on, or:

Vehicles with automatic transmission

- Press the brake pedal.

Vehicles with manual transmission

- Press the clutch pedal.

STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE

Note: You can only operate the starter for a limited period of time, for example 10 seconds. The number of start attempts is limited to approximately six. If you exceed this limit, the system will not allow you to try again until a period of time has elapsed, for example 30 minutes.

Cold or hot engine

Vehicles with manual transmission

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

Note: Releasing the clutch pedal during engine start may stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on.

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Start the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

Note: Releasing the brake pedal during engine start may stop the engine cranking and return to ignition on.

1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. Start the engine.

All vehicles

If the engine does not start, wait for a short period and try again.

If the engine does not start after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow the flooded engine procedure.

If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below -25^ ( -13^ ), press the accelerator pedal to the mid-way point of its travel and try again.

Flooded engine

Vehicles with manual transmission

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Start the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P or N.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Fully depress the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine.

All vehicles

If the engine does not start, repeat the cold or hot engine procedure.

Engine idle speed after starting

The speed at which the engine idles immediately after starting will vary depending on the engine temperature.

The idle speed is automatically increased when the engine is cold this is to heat the catalytic converter. This keeps the vehicle emissions to an absolute minimum.

The idle speed will slowly decrease to the normal level as the catalytic converter warms up.

STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE - E85

For general information on starting a gasoline engine. See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 121).

Starting at low ambient temperatures

When the temperature is lower than -10^ ( 14^ ) and the vehicle is filled with E85, an engine block heater should be used to facilitate starting. See Engine Block Heater (page 123). Failure to do this will result in a non start.

If the temperature is expected to remain below -10°C (14°F), it is recommended that you increase the proportion of gasoline in the tank by topping up with 95 octane unleaded gasoline if the tank is not already full. About 10 liters (2.2 gallons) of gasoline will reduce the proportion of E85 in a 34 full tank from 85% to 70% and will considerably improve cold start capability.

If, at very low temperatures, the tank is filled with only E85 and there is no way to use an engine block heater, you may experience difficulties starting the engine.

If the engine fails to start, proceed as follows:

1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.

2. Turn the ignition key to position III.

CAUTION

Release the ignition key as soon as the engine has started.

1. Gradually release the accelerator pedal after five seconds of engine cranking or as the engine speed rises.

If the engine fails to start, repeat steps 1, 2 and 3, or connect an engine block heater for two hours before attempting another start.

During starting, the fuel injectors are turned off as long as the accelerator pedal is depressed. This can be used to drain excessive fuel from the intake manifold after several unsuccessful starting attempts.

If the battery has been disconnected or after the fuel type has been changed, the idle speed may be irregular. This will improve after 10 to 30 seconds.

STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE

Cold or hot engine

All vehicles

Note: When the temperature is below -15^ ( 5^ ), you may need to crank the engine for up to 25 seconds.

Note: Continue cranking the engine until it starts.

Note: You can only operate the starter for a maximum of 30 seconds at a time.

Switch the ignition on and wait until the glow plug indicator goes off.

Vehicles with manual transmission

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Start the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

1. Select park or neutral.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. Start the engine.

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER

The DPF forms part of the emissions reduction systems fitted to your vehicle. It filters harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the exhaust gas.

Regeneration

WARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The DPF regeneration process creates very high exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during and after DPF regeneration, and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard.

CAUTION

Avoid running out of fuel.

Note: During regeneration at low speed or engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic odor and could notice a clicking metallic sound. This is due to the high temperatures reached during regeneration and is normal.

Note: After you have switched your engine off the fans may continue to run for a short period of time.

Unlike a normal filter which requires periodic replacement, the DPF has been designed to regenerate, or clean itself to maintain operating efficiency. The regeneration process takes place automatically. However, some driving conditions mean that you may need to support the regeneration process.

If you drive only short distances or your journeys contain frequent stopping and starting, where there is increased acceleration and deceleration, occasional trips with the following conditions will assist the regeneration process:

• Drive your vehicle at a constant speed, preferably on a main road or highway, for up to 20 minutes.
• Avoid prolonged idling and always observe speed limits and road conditions.
• Do not switch off the ignition.
• Use a lower gear than normal to maintain a higher engine speed during this journey, where appropriate.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE

Vehicles with a turbocharger

CAUTION

Do not switch the engine off when it is running at high speed. If you do, the turbocharger will continue running after the engine oil pressure has dropped to zero. This will lead to premature turbocharger bearing wear.

Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until the engine has reached idle speed and then switch it off.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER

CAUTION

Make sure you disconnect the power cable from the engine heater connector before driving away.

Note: The engine heater connector is located in the radiator grille at the front of your vehicle.

Mechanical component with a circular opening and an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

E97918

Connect the engine heater for 2 to 3 hours before starting the engine.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS

Stop refueling after the fuel nozzle stops the second time. Additional fuel will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank which could lead to fuel overflowing. Fuel spillage could be hazardous to other road users.

Do not use any kind of flames or heat near the fuel system. The fuel system is under pressure. There is a risk of injury if the fuel system is leaking.

FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE

CAUTION

Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline with additives containing other metallic compounds (e.g. manganese-based). They could damage the emission system.

Note: We recommend that you use only high quality fuel without additives or other engine treatments.

Use minimum 95 octane unleaded gasoline that meets the specification defined by EN 228, or the equivalent national specification.

Your vehicle is suitable for use with ethanol blends up to 10% (E5 and E10).

FUEL QUALITY - E85

WARNINGS

Do not modify the fuel system configuration or the components in the system.

Do not replace the fuel system or the components with parts not specially designed to be used with E85.

CAUTIONS

Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline with additives containing other metallic compounds (e.g. manganese-based). They could damage the emission system.

Do not use methanol instead of E85.

Note: We recommend that you use only high quality fuel without additives or other engine treatments.

Note: When using E85, you may experience a higher fuel consumption.

Note: Your vehicle will operate well on commercial quality 95 octane unleaded gasoline, but only high quality E85 offers the same protection and performance.

Use minimum 95 octane unleaded gasoline that meets the specification defined by EN 228, or equivalent. You can also use a mixture of unleaded gasoline and E85.

Long-term storage

Due to small amounts of corrosive impurities that may be found in the E85, it is recommended that you fill the tank with only 95 octane unleaded gasoline prior to long-term storage of your vehicle.

FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL

WARNING

Do not mix diesel with oil, gasoline or other liquids. This could cause a chemical reaction.

CAUTIONS

Do not add kerosene, paraffin or gasoline to diesel. This could cause damage to the fuel system.

CAUTIONS

Use diesel that meets the specification defined by EN 590, or the relevant national specification.

Note: We recommend that you use only high quality fuel.

Note: The use of additives or other engine treatments not approved by Ford is not recommended.

Note: We do not recommend the prolonged use of additives intended to prevent fuel waxing.

Long-term storage

Most diesel fuels contain bio-diesel, it is recommended to fill the tank with purely mineral diesel (where available) or add an anti-oxidant prior to long-term storage of your vehicle exceeding two months. Your dealer can help you with a suitable anti-oxidant.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The exhaust radiate a considerable amount of heating use, and after you have switched engine off. This is a potential fire bed.

Driving with a catalytic converter

CAUTIONS

Avoid running out of fuel.

Do not crank the engine for long periods.

Do not run the engine when a spark plug lead is disconnected.

CAUTIONS

Do not push-start or tow-start your vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 248).
Do not switch the ignition off when driving.

REFUELING

CAUTION

Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with the incorrect fuel. This could damage the engine. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately.

REFUELING - E85

CAUTION

Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with the incorrect fuel. This could damage the engine. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician immediately.

After refueling, allow 5 minutes of normal engine operation above 48 km/h (30 mph) to reduce the risk of an increased engine restart time.

FUEL CONSUMPTION

The CO2 and fuel consumption figures are derived from laboratory tests according to EEC Directive 80/1268/EEC and subsequent amendments and are carried out by all vehicle manufacturers.

They are intended as a comparison between makes and models of vehicles. They are not intended to represent the real world fuel consumption you may get from your vehicle. Real world fuel consumption is governed by many factors including; driving style, high speed driving, stop/start driving, air conditioning usage, the accessories fitted and towing etc.

Your Ford dealer can give you advice on improving your fuel consumption.

FUEL FILLER DOOR

WARNINGS

Take care when refueling to avoid spilling any residual fuel from the fuel nozzle.

Do not use any kind of flames or heat near the fuel system. The fuel system is under pressure. There is a risk of if the fuel system is leaking.

CAUTION

If you use a high pressure spray to wash your vehicle, only spray the fuel filler door briefly from a distance not than 200 millimeters (8 inches).

Note: Central locking also locks and unlocks the fuel filler door. See Locking and Unlocking (page 32).

Close-up of a blue car's side panel with a purple fuel can being inserted, showing no text or symbols.

E86613

1. Press the door to open it. Open the door fully until it engages.

Diagram of a fuel nozzle with an inset showing a labeled component 'A' (no text or symbols present)

E139202

Note: When you insert the fuel nozzle, a spring loaded inhibitor will open if the correct size nozzle is detected. This helps to avoid filling up with the wrong fuel.

1. Insert the fuel nozzle up to and including the first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting on the cover of the fuel pipe opening.

WARNING

Stop refueling after the fuel nozzle stops the second time. Additional fuel will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank which could lead to fuel overflowing. Fuel spillage could be hazardous to other road users.

A B E139203

Incorrect positionA

Correct positionB

1. Do not lift the nozzle during refilling. This can affect the flow of fuel and shut off of the fuel nozzle before the fuel tank is full.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular housing and a curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

E139355

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Operate the nozzle within the area shown.

WARNINGS

We recommend that you remove the fuel nozzle slowly to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel. Alternatively you can wait 10 seconds e removing the fuel nozzle.

Do not remove the nozzle from its fully inserted position during the entire refueling process.

Close-up of a fuel nozzle with attached nozzle and handle (no visible text or symbols)

E119081

1. Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove it.

Refueling with a fuel can

Use the funnel which is located in the spare wheel well.

4-door and 5-door

Fuel Consumption Figures

Variant			CombinedExtra-Urban sions	CO2 Emis-
	l/100 km (mpg)	l/100 km (mpg)	l/100 km (mpg)	g/km
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage IV (92kW/125PS), 5-speed manual transmission				1707.2 (39.2)5.
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V (88kW/120PS), 5-speed manual transmission				1566.7 (42.2)5.
1.6L EcoBoost (118kW/160PS), 6-speed manual transmission				1556.6 (42.8)5
2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4 Stage IV (107kW/145PS)				1897.9 (35.8)6
2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4 Stage V (107kW/145PS)	11.3 (25)	6 (47.1)	8 (35.3)	184
2.0L EcoBoost - MI4 (149kW/203PS), 6-speed manual transmission	10.4 (27.2)	6 (47.1)	7.6 (37.2)	176
2.0L EcoBoost - MI4 (177kW/240PS), 6-speed manual transmission	10.4 (27.2)	6 (47.1)	7.6 (37.2)	176
2.0L EcoBoost - MI4 (149kW/203PS), 6-speed automatic transmission	10.7 (26.4)	6 (47.1)	7.7 (36.7)	179
2.0L EcoBoost - MI4 (177kW/240PS), 6-speed automatic transmission	10.9 (26.4)	6 (47.1)	7.7 (36.7)	179
2.3L Duratec-HE - MI4 (118kW/160PS), 6-speed automatic transmission		13.8 (29.5)	6.7 (42.2)	23

Fuel and Refueling

Variant			CombinedExtra-Urban sions	CO2 Emis-
	l/100 km (mpg)	l/100 km (mpg)	l/100 km (mpg)	g/km
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmission without start-stop				1294.9 (57.6)4.2 (
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmission with start-stop ECONETIC				1094.2 (67.3)3.8 (
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmission with start-stop				1184.5 (62.8)4.1 (
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW Stage IV, 6-speed manual transmission				1545.8 (48.7)4.8 (
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW Stage V, 6-speed manual transmission				1294.9 (57.6)4.2 (
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW Stage IV (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmission ECONETIC				1395.3 (53.3)4.6 (
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW Stage IV (100kW/136PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion			7.1 (39.8)5.5 (51.4)89.7 (29.1)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW Stage V, 6-speed automatic transmission				1365.2 (54.3)4.5 (
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi - DW (129kW/175PS), 6-speed manual transmission	8.4 (33.6)	4.9 (57.6)	6.2 (45.6)	165
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi - DW (147kW/200PS)	7.8 (36.2)	5 (56.5)	6 (47.1)	159

Wagon

Fuel Consumption Figures

Variant			CombinedExtra-Urban sions	g/km
	l/100 km (mpg)	l/100 km (mpg)	l/100 km (mpg)
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage IV (92kW/125PS), 5-speed manual transmission				1707.2 (39.2)5.
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V (88kW/120PS), 5-speed manual transmission				1566.7 (42.2)5.
1.6L EcoBoost (118kW/160PS), 6-speed manual transmission				1556.6 (42.8)5
2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4 Stage IV (107kW/145PS)				1897.9 (35.8)6
2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4 Stage V (107kW/145PS)				11.31(24.9) (35.3)6 (-
2.0L EcoBoost (149kW/203PS), 6-speed manual transmission	10.4 (27.2)	6 (47.1)	7.6 (37.2)	176
2.0L EcoBoost (177kW/240PS), 6-speed manual transmission	10.4 (27.2)	6 (47.1)	7.6 (37.2)	176
2.0L EcoBoost (149kW/203PS), 6-speed automatic transmission	10.7 (26.4)	6 (47.1)	7.7 (36.7)	179
2.0L EcoBoost (177kW/240PS), 6-speed automatic transmission	10.9 (26.4)	6 (47.1)	7.7 (36.7)	179
2.3L Duratec-HE (118kW/160PS), 6-speed automatic transmission	13.8 (20.5)	6.7 (42.2)	9.3 (30.4)	223

Fuel and Refueling

Variant			CombinedExtra-Urban sions	CO2 Emis-
	l/100 km (mpg)	l/100 km (mpg)	l/100 km (mpg)	g/km
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmission without start-stop				1294.9 (57.6)4.2 (
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmission with start-stop ECONETIC				1094.2 (67.3)3.8 (
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmission with start-stop				1184.5 (62.8)4.1 (
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW Stage IV				1545.8 (48.7)4.8 (
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW Stage V, 6-speed manual transmission				1294.9 (57.6)4.2 (
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmission ECONETIC				1395.3 (53.3)4.6 (
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW Stage IV (100kW/136PS), 6-speed automatic transmis-sion			7.1 (39.8)5.5 (51.4)89.7 (29.1)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW Stage V, 6-speed automatic transmission				1365.2 (54.3)4.5 (
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi - DW (129kW/175PS), 6-speed manual transmission	8.4 (33.6)	4.9 (57.6)	6.2 (45.6)	165
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi - DW (147kW/200PS)	7.8 (36.2)	5 (56.5)	6 (47.1)	159

Transmission

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

CAUTION

Do not engage reverse gear when the vehicle is moving. This can cause damage to the transmission.

3D rendered mechanical component with an upward arrow and a dot, no visible text or symbols

On some vehicles it is necessary to raise the collar whilst selecting reverse gear.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Selector lever positions

3D rendered image of a gray mechanical lever with a handle and control buttons (no text or symbols)

E80836

ParkP

ReverseR

NeutralN

DriveD

Sport mode and manual shiftingS

WARNING

Apply the brakes before moving the selector lever and keep them applied until you are ready to move off.

Note: A cold engine has a higher idle speed. This will increase the tendency for your vehicle to creep when you have selected a drive gear.

Press the button on the selector lever to select reverse and park.

The selector lever position will be shown in the information display.

Park

WARNINGS

Select park only when your vehicle is stationary.

Apply the parking brake and select park before leaving your vehicle. Make sure that the selector is latched in position.

Note: An audible warning will sound if you open the driver's door and you have not selected park.

In this position, power is not transmitted to the drive wheels and the transmission is locked. You can start the engine with the selector lever in this position.

Reverse

WARNING

Select reverse only when your vehicle is stationary and the engine is at idle speed.

Neutral

In this position, power is not transmitted to the drive wheels but the transmission is not locked. You can start the engine with the selector lever in this position.

Drive

Select drive to shift automatically through the forward gears.

Sport mode and manual shifting

PRN D + S + 1 2

E80837

Note: A shift will occur only when the vehicle speed and the engine speed are appropriate.

Note: When you select position S, a gear change may occur depending on the accelerator pedal position in relation to actual vehicle speed.

Activate sport mode by moving the selector lever to position S. Sport mode will remain active until you shift manually up or down the gears.

Select manual shifting to shift manually through the forward gears. Push the selector lever forwards to shift down and pull it backwards to shift up.

Drive modes

The transmission will select the appropriate gear for optimum performance based on ambient temperature, road gradient, vehicle load and driver input.

Hints on driving with an automatic transmission

Moving off

1. Release the parking brake.
2. Release the brake pedal and press the accelerator pedal.

Stopping

1. Release the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal.
2. Apply the parking brake.

Kickdown

Press the accelerator pedal fully with the selector lever in the drive position to select the next lowest gear for optimum performance. Release the accelerator pedal when you no longer require kickdown.

Emergency park position release lever

Use the lever to move the selector lever from the park position in the event of an electrical malfunction or if your vehicle has a flat battery.

Close-up of a medical or laboratory procedure showing a tool interacting with a curved surface, with an inset image of a device (no visible text or symbols)

1. Remove the center console side panel.

Industrial machinery component with a curved arrow indicating motion or flow (no visible text or symbols)

Note: The lever is yellow.

1. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver into the slot and turn the screwdriver clockwise 90 degrees.

Note: Depending on applicable laws and regulations in the country for which your vehicle was originally built, the brake lamps may flash if you brake heavily.

Note: Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a concern. In normal operation, the system may emit occasional or intermittent squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are usually caused by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture, road dust, salt or mud.

Disc brakes

Wet brake discs result in reduced braking efficiency. Dab the brake pedal when driving from a car wash to remove the film of water.

ABS

WARNING

The ABS does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

The ABS helps you to maintain full steering and directional stability when you brake heavily in an emergency, by preventing the road wheels from locking.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES

Note: When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal.

The ABS will not eliminate the risks when:

- you drive too close to the vehicle in front of you

• the vehicle is aquaplaning

·you take corners too fast

- the road surface is poor.

PARKING BRAKE

WARNING

Vehicles with an automatic transmission should always be left with the selector lever in position P

(Park).

- Press the foot brake pedal firmly.

- Pull the parking brake lever up smartly to its fullest extent.

- Do not press the release button while pulling the lever up.

- If your vehicle is parked on a hill and facing uphill, select first gear or P (Park) and turn the steering wheel away from the curb.

- If your vehicle is parked on a hill and facing downhill, select reverse gear or P (Park) and turn the steering wheel towards the curb.

To release the parking brake, press the brake pedal firmly, pull the lever up slightly, depress the release button and push the lever down.

Electronic stability program (ESP)

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

graph TD
    A["A"] --> B1["B"]
    B1 --> B2["B"]
    B2 --> B3["B"]
    B3 --> A2["A"]
    A2 --> B4["B"]
    B4 --> B5["B"]
    B5 --> A3["A"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style B2 fill:#bfb,stroke:#333
    style B3 fill:#ffb,stroke:#333
    style A3 fill:#fbb,stroke:#333
    style A4 fill:#fbb,stroke:#333

E72903

Without ESPA

With ESPB

The system supports stability when the vehicle starts to slide away from your intended path. This is performed by braking individual wheels and reducing engine torque as needed.

The system also provides an enhanced traction control function by reducing engine torque if the wheels spin when you accelerate. This improves your ability to pull away on slippery roads or loose surfaces, and improves comfort by limiting wheel spin in hairpin bends.

Stability control (ESP) warning lamp

While driving, it flashes during activation of the system. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 71).

Emergency brake assist

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

The system will detect when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal. It will provide maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal. The system can reduce stopping distances in critical situations.

USING STABILITY CONTROL

Note: The system will be switched on automatically every time you switch the ignition on.

Vehicles with stability control (ESP) switch

Press and hold the switch for one second. The switch will illuminate. A message will be shown in the display. See Information Messages (page 88).

Press the switch again to turn the system on.

For item location: See At a Glance (page 9).

Vehicles without stability control (ESP) switch

Turn the system off and on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 75).

The parking aid does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

CAUTIONS

Vehicles fitted with a trailer tow module not approved by us may not correctly detect obstacles.

The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause disruptive reflections.

The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.

The parking aid does not detect obstacles moving away from the vehicle. They will only be detected

shortly after they start to move towards the vehicle again.

Take particular care when reversing with a tow ball arm or rear fitted accessories e.g. a bicycle carrier, as rear parking aid will only indicate the stance from the bumper to the obstacle.

If you use a high pressure spray to wash your vehicle, only spray the sensors briefly from a distance not than 20 centimeters (8 inches).

Note: On vehicles fitted with a tow ball arm, the parking aid is deactivated automatically when any trailer lamps (or lighting boards) are connected to the 13-pin socket via a trailer tow module we have approved.

Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice and snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.

Note: The parking aid may emit false tones if it detects a signal using the same frequency as the sensors or if the vehicle is fully laden.

Note: The outer sensors may detect the side walls of a garage. If the distance between the outer sensor and the side wall remains constant for three seconds, the tone will switch off. As you continue, the inner sensors will detect rearward objects.

PARKING AID

Switching the parking aid on and off

Note: The parking aid switches off automatically when you start the engine or when you exceed 16 km/h (10 mph).

Note: The front and rear sensors are always activated or deactivated together.

The parking aid is per default off. To switch the parking aid on, press the switch in the instrument panel or select reverse gear.

The light in the switch illuminates when the parking aid is activated.

To turn it off, press the switch again.

Maneuvring with the parking aid

Top-down view of a vehicle with bidirectional arrow indicating left and right motion (no text or symbols)

E72902

Note: If a high pitch warning tone sounds for three seconds and the light in the switch is flashing, it indicates a malfunction. The system will be disabled. Have the system checked by properly trained technicians.

You will hear an intermittent tone at a distance of up to approximately 150 centimeters (59 inches) between the obstacle and rear bumper, 80 centimeters (31 inches) between the obstacle and front bumper and 50 centimeters (20 inches) to the side. Decreasing the distance accelerates the intermittent tone. A continuous tone will start at a distance of less than 30 centimeters (12 inches).

You will hear an alternating tone from the front and rear if obstacles are closer than 30 centimeters (12 inches) to the front and rear bumpers.

Cruise control allows you to control your speed using the switches on the steering wheel. You can use cruise control when you exceed 30 km/h (20 mph).

USING CRUISE CONTROL

WARNING

Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic, on twisty roads or when the road surface is slippery.

Switching cruise control on

Close-up of a car seatbelt switch with purple and black buttons, no visible text or symbols

E70612

Setting a speed

Close-up of a car seatbelt switch with purple and black buttons, no visible text or symbols

E70615

Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switch to store and maintain your current speed. The cruise control indicator illuminates.

Changing the set speed

WARNING

When you are going downhill, your speed may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the es. Change down a gear and press the switch to assist the system in taining the set speed.

Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed will not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, you will return to the speed that you previously set.

Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switch to accelerate or decelerate.

Canceling the set speed

Close-up of a car wheel's side panel showing a purple and black key inserted into the center (no text or symbols visible)

E70614

Press the brake pedal or the CAN switch. The system will no longer control your speed. The cruise control indicator will go off but the system will retain the speed that you previously set.

Resuming the set speed

Close-up of a car interior control panel with purple and black buttons, no visible text or symbols

E70616

Press the RES switch. The cruise control indicator illuminates and the system will attempt to resume the speed that you previously set.

Switching cruise control off

Close-up of a car seatbelt switch with black and purple buttons, no visible text or symbols

E70613

Press the OFF switch. The system will not retain the speed that you previously set. The cruise control indicator will go off.

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGS

Use load securing straps to an approved standard, e.g. DIN.

Make sure that you secure all loose items properly.

Place luggage and other loads as low and as far forward as possible within the luggage or loadspace.

Do not drive with the tailgate or rear door open. Exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle.

Do not exceed the maximum front and rear axle loads for your vehicle. See Vehicle identification (page

250).

Heavy loads, when placed in the passenger compartment, should be on folded rear seats as shown. See

Rear Seats (page 115).

CAUTIONS

Do not allow items to contact the rear windows.

Do not use any abrasive materials to clean the interior of the rear windows.

Do not install stickers or labels to the interior of the rear windows.

3D rendered image of a person sitting in a chair holding a black box (no text or symbols visible)

E97377

LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS

Wagon

3D rendering of a car's front bumper with a magnified inset showing a circular component (no text or symbols)

E86912

4-door and 5-door

Top-down view of a transparent car hood with a highlighted internal component (no text or symbols visible)

E86913

SLIDING LOADSPACE FLOOR

WARNING

Do not slide the loadspace floor rearwards when the vehicle is standing on an incline of 15 degrees more and facing uphill.

CAUTION

The maximum permissible weight on the sliding loadspace floor is 200 kilograms (441 pounds).

The maximum permissible weight on the end of the sliding loadspace floor when the floor is in the fully extended position (slid outside the luggage compartment) is 120 kilograms (265 pounds).

3D rendering of a car trunk with visible structural components and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

E74810

Press the unlocking handle and pull the loadspace floor rearwards. It will stop and engage at a midway position.

Interior view of a car trunk with a black plastic tray and directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

E74811

To slide it out fully, press the unlocking handle again and pull it out until it engages in the end position.

To slide it forwards, press the unlocking handle and push it forwards.

Note: You do not have to exert as much pressure on the unlocking handle if you push the loadspace floor forwards slightly when operating it.

Storage compartment

A storage compartment is located in the floor at the rear of the luggage compartment.

To gain access to the storage compartment, lift up the sliding loadspace floor as follows:

1 2 E74812

Interior view of a car showing the hood and engine compartment with a numbered component (3), no visible text or symbols.

E74813

1. Press the unlocking handle and pull the loadspace floor rearwards a short way.
2. Lift up the rear of the floor (1).
3. Push the floor forwards until it engages at the front (2).
4. Release the support leg from the clip on the underside of the floor.
5. Insert the end into the square retainer in the left-hand rail (3).
6. Lift the storage compartment cover using the loop.

To return the loadspace floor to the normal position:

1. Hold the floor with one hand and release the support leg with the other hand.

2. Insert the support leg back into the clip.

3. Lower the floor.

4. Press the unlocking handle and pull the loadspace floor rearwards until it drops into position on the rails.

REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE

Vehicles with a sliding loadspace floor

Raise the loadspace floor to gain access to the storage compartment. See Sliding Loadspace Floor (page 143).

Vehicles without a sliding loadspace floor

Interior view of a car trunk panel with a highlighted up-right arrow (no text or symbols)

E87689

CARGO NETS

Luggage retention net Installing the net

Close-up of a hand holding a small object with an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

E87052

1. Push the ends of the upper bar towards each other and insert them into the retainers on the roof. Push the bar forwards into the narrow section of the retainers.

Top-down view of a car backrest with a visible seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols)

E87053

1. Attach the net to the luggage anchor points. See Luggage Anchor Points (page 142).

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and seatbelt switch, with a magnified inset highlighting the seatbelt (no text or symbols)

1. Tighten the belts.

Removing the net

Interior view of a car with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

1. Release the belts.
2. Remove the net from the luggage anchor points.
3. Remove the upper bars.

LUGGAGE COVERS

WARNING

Do not place objects on the luggage cover.

Close-up of a car interior showing a black plastic clip and a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

E112571

Pull out the cover until it locks.

Close-up of a car's front wheel and dashboard with a white downward arrow icon on the backrest (no text or symbols)

E112572

Release it from the retaining points by pressing below the handle. Let it roll slowly back into the case.

Interior view of a car showing a seatbelt and directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

E112588

To remove or install the cover, push either end of the case inwards.

Stowing the luggage cover - Wagon without full size spare wheel

Close-up of a black plastic component resting on a car engine casing (no visible text or symbols)

E134798

Space is provided under the luggage compartment floor.

ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS

Roof rack

WARNINGS

If you use a roof rack, the fuel consumption of your vehicle will be higher and you may experience ent driving characteristics.

Read and follow the manufacturer's instructions when you are fitting a roof rack.

CAUTION

Do not exceed the maximum permissible roof load of 75 kilograms (165 pounds) (including the roof).

Check the security of the roof rack and tighten its fittings as follows:

•before starting

•after driving 50 kilometers (30 miles)

-at 1000 kilometers (600 miles) intervals.

To minimize windnoise when the roof rack is not in use, cross rails should be moved rearwards and placed together. To reduce fuel consumption, cross rails should be removed when not in use.

LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES

WARNING

Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of 60 kilograms (132 pounds) on two load retaining es and 30 kilograms (66 pounds) on

Check the security of the load retaining fixtures and tighten its fittings as follows:

•before starting
•after driving 50 kilometers (30 miles)
-at 1000 kilometers (600 miles) intervals.

Installing the load retaining fixtures

16mm 6 Nm E75003

Installing the load bracket

WARNINGS

Install the load bracket with the longest section towards the rear of the vehicle. If you install it the wrong round, it may not hold the box in place a event of an accident.

Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of 20 kilograms (44 pounds).

180° 1 2 3 3

E76378

1. Turn the box over.
2. Position the load bracket.
3. Secure the load bracket with four screws.

Diagram showing two mechanical components with bolts, one being compressed and the other assembled (no text or symbols)

E76379

1. Slide the captured bolts onto the load retaining fixture.

✓ × Max. 20 Kg

E76380

1. Secure the load bracket with the two wing nuts.
2. Remove in the reverse order.

DOG GUARD

CAUTION

Keep a distance of at least one centimeter between the dog guard and the seats in front of it.

Installing behind the front seats

3D rendered mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a small component (no text or symbols visible)

E86848

1. Push the ends of the bar on the grille towards each other and insert them into the retainers on the roof. Push the bar forwards into the narrow section of the retainers.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket mounted on a housing (no text or symbols visible)

E87782

1. Attach the dog guard to the lower anchor points. Do not tighten the screws.

Interior view of a kitchen appliance with a grid-patterned ceiling and a close-up of a pipe fitting (no visible text or symbols)

1. Attach the grille to the lower bar with the handwheels. Do not tighten the handwheels.
2. Tighten the screws at the lower anchor points.
3. Tighten the handwheels.

Installing behind the rear seats

3D rendered mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to its side (no text or symbols)

E86848

1. Push the ends of the bar on the grille towards each other and insert them into the retainers on the roof. Push the bar forwards into the narrow section of the retainers.

Top-down view of a car cab with visible seats and ventilation grilles (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a mechanical component with two black arrows pointing to features (no visible text or symbols)

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car, battery, and switch (no visible text or symbols)

E104424

1. Remove two screws from both the luggage anchor points. See Luggage Anchor Points (page 142).
2. Attach the lower bar to the grille with the handwheels. Do not tighten the handwheels.
3. Attach the dog guard lower bar to the luggage anchor points, secure with the new supplied screws.
4. Tighten the handwheels.

Remove in the reverse order.

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNINGS

Do not exceed 100 km/h (62 mph).

The rear tire pressures must be increased by 0.2 bar (3 psi) above specification. See Technical

Specifications (page 199).

Do not exceed the maximum gross train weight stated on the vehicle identification plate. See Vehicle

identification (page 250).

CAUTION

Do not exceed the maximum permissible nose weight, i.e. vertical weight on the tow ball, of 90 grams (198 pounds).

Note: Not all vehicles are suitable or approved to have tow bars fitted. Check with your dealer first.

Place loads as low and central to the axle(s) of the trailer as possible. If you are towing with an unladen vehicle, the load in the trailer should be placed toward the nose, within the maximum nose load, as this gives the best stability.

The stability of the vehicle to trailer combination is very much dependant on the quality of the trailer.

In high altitude regions above 1000 meters (3281 feet), the stipulated maximum permitted gross train weight must be reduced by 10% for every additional 1000 meters (3281 feet).

Trailer Lighting

The electrical system on your vehicle is not suitable for towing trailers with LED lamps.

Steep gradients

WARNING

The overrun brake on a trailer is not controlled by ABS.

Change down a gear before you reach a steep downhill gradient.

TOW BALL

WARNINGS

When not in use, always transport the tow ball arm securely fastened in the luggage compartment.

Take special care when fitting the tow ball arm as the safety of the vehicle and the trailer depends on

Do not use any tools for mounting or dismounting the tow ball arm. Do not modify the trailer coupling. Do not semble or repair the tow ball arm.

3D rendered mechanical component with curved pipe and flanged base (no visible text or symbols)

E71328

A 13-pin trailer socket and the tow ball arm seat are provided underneath the rear bumper. Turn the trailer socket down through 90 degrees until it engages in the end position.

Unlocking the tow ball arm mechanism

Diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating assembly or assembly steps.

E71329

1. Remove the protecting cap (1). Insert the key and turn it clockwise to unlock (2).
2. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull the handwheel out and turn it clockwise until it clicks (3).
3. The red mark on the handwheel must align with the green mark on the tow ball.
4. Release the handwheel. The tow ball arm is unlocked.

Inserting the tow ball arm

Mechanical component diagram showing a handle, cylindrical part, and two directional arrows labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols on parts)

E71330

WARNING

The tow ball arm may only be inserted when completely unlocked.

1. Pull out the plug.
2. Insert the tow ball arm vertically and press it upwards until it engages (1). Do not hold your hand near the handwheel.
3. The green mark on the handwheel must align with the green mark on the tow ball.
4. To lock, turn the key counterclockwise and remove the key (2).
5. Pull the protecting cap from the key bow and press it onto the lock.

Driving with a trailer

3D rendered mechanical component with labeled parts A and B, no readable text or symbols beyond labels

WARNING

If any of the below conditions cannot be met, do not use the tow bar and have it checked by a properly trained technician.

Before starting your journey, make sure that the tow ball arm is properly locked. Check that:

• the green marks are aligned
•the handwheel (A) is correctly fitted to the tow ball arm
- you have removed the key (B)
- the tow ball arm is securely positioned. It must not move when jerked.

Removing the tow ball arm

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating assembly steps

E71332

1. Unhitch the trailer.
2. Remove the protecting cap. Press the cap into the key bow. Insert the key and unlock (1).
3. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull the handwheel out, turn it clockwise against the stop (2) and remove the tow ball arm (3).
4. Release the handwheel.

When unlocked in this way, the tow ball arm can be reinserted at any time.

Driving without a trailer

Mechanical component diagram showing a curved pipe with two connectors and a cylindrical housing, with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

E94771

1. Remove the tow ball arm.
2. Insert the plug into its seat (1).

WARNING

Never unlock the tow ball arm with the trailer attached.

Maintenance

WARNING

Remove the tow ball arm and protect the seat with the plug before steam cleaning your vehicle.

Keep the system clean. Periodically lubricate bearings, sliding surfaces, and locking balls with resin-free grease or oil and the lock with graphite.

In case of loss, replacement keys are available from the manufacturer by stating the number on the lock cylinder.

BREAKING-IN

Tires

WARNING

New tires need to be run-in for approximately 500 kilometers (300 miles). During this time, you mayience different driving characteristics.

Brakes and clutch

WARNING

Avoid heavy use of the brakes and clutch if possible for the first 150 kilometers (100 miles) in town and the first 1500 kilometers (1000 miles) eeways.

Engine

CAUTION

Avoid driving too fast during the first 1500 kilometers (1000 miles). Vary your speed frequently and change up ugh the gears early. Do not labor the ne.

GENERAL DRIVING POINTS

The distance between the underside of your vehicle and the ground is reduced compared to other models. Drive with extreme care to avoid damage to your vehicle.

COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS

The functional operation of some components and systems can be affected at temperatures below -30^ ( -22^ ).

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water

CAUTIONS

Drive through water in an emergency only, and not as part of normal driving.

Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

In an emergency, the vehicle can be driven through water to a maximum depth of 200 millimeters (8 inches) and at a maximum speed of 10 km/h (6 mph). Extra caution should be exercised when driving through flowing water.

When driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the vehicle. After driving through water, and as soon as it is safe to do so:

- Depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved.

- Check that the horn works.

- Check that the vehicle's lights are fully operational.

- Check the power assistance of the steering system.

FIRST AID KIT

Space is provided in the luggage compartment.

4-door

Close-up of a vehicle's side panel with a black arrow pointing to the front panel (no visible text or symbols)

E87654

5-door

3D-rendered object with a black arrow pointing to a surface, no visible text or symbols

E87655

Wagon

Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols visible)

E87656

WARNING TRIANGLE

4-door and 5-door

Close-up of a vehicle door panel with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

E87657

Space is provided in the luggage compartment.

Wagon and vehicles with tire repair kit

Space is provided under the carpet.

See Rear Under Floor Storage (page 145).

FUSE BOX LOCATIONS

Engine compartment fuse box

Close-up of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols visible)

E72588

Central fuse box

All vehicles

Interior view of a car showing the rear door, side panel, and window (no visible text or symbols)

E72589

1. Pinch the retaining clips to release the cover.

Cross-sectional diagram of a vehicle engine showing internal components and structural layout (no text or labels)

E72590

1. Remove the cover.
2. Turn the knob through 90 degrees and release the fuse box from the retaining bracket.
3. Lower the fuse box cover and pull it towards you.
4. Install in the reverse order.

Rear fuse box - 4-door and 5-door

Close-up of a mechanical component with a labeled section (1), no visible text or symbols beyond the number

E87481

1. Remove the cover.

Fuses

Diagram of a multi-layered mechanical or electrical component with numbered annotation '2' pointing to its top layer.

E87482
2. Remove the relevant fuse box cover.

Rear fuse box - Wagon

1. Release the catches.
2. Remove the cover.

Diagram of a mechanical or electronic component with numbered annotations pointing to specific parts.

E87480
3. Remove the relevant fuse box cover.

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["Node 1"]
    A --> C["Node 2"]
    A --> D["Node 3"]
    A --> E["Node 4"]

E87479

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART

Engine compartment fuse box

F29 F35 F45 F28 F34 F44 F27 F33 F39 F43 F26 F21 F25 F32 F38 F42 F20 F24 F31 F37 F41 F19 F23 F30 F36 F40 F18 F22 F17 F16 F5 F4 F3 F8 F11 F14 F2 F7 F10 F13 F1 F6 F9 F12 F15

E75525

		Circuits protectedAmpere ratingFuse
		Transmission control module (AWF21)10F1
		Transmission control module (MPS6)15F1
		Glow plug monitoring (diesel engines)5F2

Fuses

		Circuits protectedAmpere ratingFuse
F2	5	Vaporizer glow plug monitoring (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
F3	70^1	Engine cooling fan - dual fan (2.3L Duratec-HE and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi automatic)
F3	80^1	Electric hydraulic power steering (EHPAS) (1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V, 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi, 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi, 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
		Glow plugs60F4
F5	60	Engine cooling fan (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi manual, 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V, 2.0L Duratec-HE, 2.3L Duratec-HE, 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi)
		Engine cooling fan - dual fan (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)70F5
		HEGO sensor (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)7.5F6
F6	10	HEGO sensors 1, CMS sensor, Oxygen sensor (engine management)
F6	20	Vaporizer glow plug (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
		Relay coils5F7
F8	10	Powertrain control module, Fuel metering unit, MAF sensor, fuel rail pressure control valve (engine management).
F8	20	Powertrain control module (2.0L EcoBoost SCTi and 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
F8	15	Powertrain control module (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi, 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
F9	10	MAF Sensor, Fuel Injectors, Variable Intake Valve, Variable Exhaust Valve, ignition coils (engine management).
		Fuel pump vaporizer (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)5
	7.5F9	MAF Sensor, EGR bypass Valve, Fuel pump vaporizer (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) (engine management)
	7.5F9	Degas valve, TMAF sensor, active grille shutter, bypass valve, relay coil, auxiliary run on, water pump (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi).
	10F10	Engine control module (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V)
		Auxiliary run on, water pump (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)7.5F10
	10F11	PCV Valve, VCV Valve, Water in Fuel Sensor, Sonic Purge Valve, Swirl Control Valve, Variable Intake Valve, EGR Valve, IVVT Oil Control Valve (engine management). T.MAF sensor, variable exhaust timing valve, active grille shutter, cannister purge valve, turbo control valve, waste gate valve (engine management).
	10F11	Turbo control valve, MAF sensor, active grille shutter, EGR valve, VCV valve (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)
F11	5	MAF sensor, Water in Fuel Sensor, Active grille shutter, inlet metering valve (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V).
	7.5F11	Fuel rail pressure, fuel metering unit, fuel pump vaporiser, active grille shutter (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
	10F11	Turbo control valve, variable intake timing valve, variable exhaust timing valve, cannister purge valve, electrical bypass valve (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi).
	15F12	Ignition coils (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi and 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi)
	10F12	Coil on Plug; Canister Purge Valve, Power Steering Pressure Switch (engine management)
	10F12	EGR throttle, variable turbo control (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi)
F12	5	Relay coils (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)
		Air conditioning15F13
	15F14	Diesel filter heater (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)
		HEGO sensor (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)10F14
		Starter relay40F15

Fuses

		Circuits protectedAmpere ratingFuse
		Diesel auxiliary heater (PTC)80F16
		Central fuse box supply A60F17
		Central fuse box supply B60F18
		Rear fuse box supply C60F19
		Rear fuse box supply D60F20
		VQM/non VQM: Cluster/Audio/AC/FLR30F21
		Windshield wiper module30F22
		Heated rear window30F23
		Headlamp washer30F24
		ABS valves30F25
	40F26	ABS pump
	25F27	Fuel fired heater
	40F28	Heater blower
F29	-	Not used
F30	5	ABS 30 feed
F31	15	Horn
F32	5	Fuel fired heater - remote control
F33	5	Light switch module, engine compartment fuse box coils
	40F34	Heated windshield (left-hand side)
F35	40	Heated windshield (right-hand side)
	15F36	Rear wiper 15 feed
F37	7.5	Heated front washer jets/FLR + FSM KL15
F38	10	PCM/TCM/EHPAS 15 feed
	15F39	Adaptive front lighting system (AFS)
F40	5	Headlamp leveling / AFS module
F41	20	Instrument panel

Fuses

		Circuits protectedAmpere ratingFuse
		Cluster IP5F42
		Audio/BVC module/DAB module15F43
		Automatic AC / Manual AC5F44
		FLR (Start Stop)5F45

^1 Fit a replacement with the same rating as the one you have removed.

Central fuse box

E124888

Left-hand driveA

Right-hand driveB

		Circuits protectedAmpere ratingFuse
		Steering wheel module7.5F1
		Cluster5F2
		Interior lamps10F3
		Engine immobilizer5F4
		Adaptive cruise control (ACC)7.5F5
		Rain sensor5F6
F7	20	Cigar lighter
F8	10	Fuel filler flap unlock supply
	15F9	Windshield washers - rear
F10	15	Windshield washers - front
F11	10	Luggage compartment release supply
F12	10	Fuel filler flap lock supply
F13	20	Fuel pump
F13	7.5	Fuel pump (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)
	5F14	Remote frequency receiver, Interior motion sensor
	5F15	Ignition switch
F16	5	Battery backup sounder (alarm system), OBD II (board computer diagnostics)
F17	5	Steering wheel vibration actuator
F18	10	SRS (airbag) supply
F19	7.5	ABS, yaw rate sensor (ESP), electric parking brake (EPB), accelerator pedal supply
F20	7.5	Electronic feed, electronic fuse, Auto-dimming mirror, lane departure warning
	15F21	Radio supplyBrake lamp switch5F22
		Moonroof20F23
F24	5	Climate Control Module and Steering Column Unit supply

Rear fuse box

4-door and 5-door

FC11 FC12 FC8 FC4 FC7 FC3 FC10 FC6 FC2 FC9 FC5 FC1 FB11 FB12 FB8 FB4 FB7 FB3 FB10 FB6 FB2 FB9 FB5 FB1 FA11 FA12 FA8 FA4 FA7 FA3 FA10 FA6 FA2 FA9 FA5 FA1

E87483

Wagon

FC11 FC12 FC8 FC4 FC7 FC3 FC10 FC6 FC2 FC9 FC5 FC1 FA9 FA10 FA11 FA12 FB9 FB10 FB11 FB12 FA5 FA6 FA7 FA8 FB5 FB6 FB7 FB8 FA1 FA2 FA3 FA4 FB1 FB2 FB3 FB4

E75526

		Circuits protectedAmpere ratingFuse
	25FA1	Door module (left-hand front) (window up/down, central locking, power folding mirror, heated mirror)
	25FA2	Door module (right-hand front) (window up/down, central locking, power folding mirror, heated mirror)
		Door module (left-hand rear) (window up/down)25FA3

Fuses

		Circuits protectedAmpere ratingFuse
		Door module (right-hand rear) (window up/down)25FA4
		Rear locking (without rear door modules)10FA5
		Auxiliary power socket15FA6
		Relay coils5FA7
		Keyless vehicle module20FA8
		Relay coils VQM (Start Stop)5FA9
		Not used-FA10
	20FA11	Accessories, trailer module
FA12	30	Power driver's seat
	FB1	Not used-
	15FB2	Suspension module
	15FB3	Heated driver's seat
	15FB4	Heated front passenger seat
	15FB5	Left-hand rear heated seat
		Not used-FB6
	15FB7	Right-hand rear heated seat
		FB8rking aid, BLIS5
FB9	30	Power front passenger seat
FB10	10	Anti-theft alarm horn
	-FB11	Not used
	-FB12	Not used
	FC1	Not used-
	FC2	Not used-
	FC3	Not used-
		Not used-FC4
	20FC5	Keyless vehicle
		Not used-FC6

Fuses

		Circuits protectedAmpere ratingFuse
		Seat memory function module5FC7
		Rear seat entertainment/CD Changer7.5FC8
		Audio amplifier20FC9
		Sony audio system10FC10
		Not used-FC11
		Not used-FC12

CHANGING A FUSE

WARNINGS

Do not modify the electrical system of your vehicle in any way. Have repairs to the electrical system and

the replacement of relays and high current fuses carried out by a properly trained technician.

Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment off before touching or attempting to change a fuse.

CAUTION

Fit a replacement fuse with the same rating as the one you have removed.

Note: You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament.

Note: All fuses, except high current fuses, are a push fit.

Note: A fuse puller is located in the engine compartment fuse box.

GENERAL INFORMATION

Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of Ford Authorized Repairers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle.

In addition to regular servicing, we recommend that you carry out the following additional checks.

WARNINGS

Switch the ignition off before touching or attempting adjustment of any kind.

Do not touch the electronic ignition system parts after you have switched the ignition on or when the engine is running. The system operates at high voltage.

Keep your hands and clothing clear of the engine cooling fan. Under certain conditions, the fan may continue to run for several minutes after you have switched the engine off.

CAUTION

When carrying out maintenance checks, make sure that filler caps are fitted securely.

Daily checks

• Exterior lamps.
  -Interior lamps.
• Warning lamps and indicators.

Check when refueling

• Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).
- Brake fluid level. See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).
- Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid Check (page 183).
•Tire pressures (when cold). See Technical Specifications (page 199).
•Tire condition. See Tire Care (page 192).

Monthly checks

• Engine coolant level (engine cold). See Engine Coolant Check (page 181).
• Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.
  •Power steering fluid level. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 182).
  • Air conditioning operation.
• Parking brake operation.
  • Horn operation.
  • Tightness of lug nuts. See Technical Specifications (page 199).

OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD

Opening the hood

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a Ford engine compartment with a black arrow pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols on the main body)

E87785

Raise the hood slightly and move the catch towards the left-hand side of the vehicle.

Close-up of a computer mouse with a cable and a magnified inset showing internal components (no visible text or symbols)

E87786

Open the hood and support it with the strut.

Closing the hood

WARNING

Make sure that the hood is closed properly.

Lower the hood and allow it to drop from under its own weight for the last 20 - 30 centimeters (8 - 11 inches).

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATEC-16V TI-VCT (SIGMA)

A B C D E J I H G F

E87714

A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182). Engine oil filler cap*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).B
C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182). Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 248).D Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 157).E Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F
G Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 183). Engine oil dipstick*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).H

I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 182).

J Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 181).

^1 The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW -1.6L ECOBOOST SCTI (SIGMA)

A B C D E J I H G F

E132430

A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

Engine oil filler cap*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).B

C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 248).D

Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 157).E

Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F

G Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 183).

Engine oil dipstick*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).H

I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 182).

J Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 181).

^1 The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATEC-HE (MI4)

A B C D E J I H G F

E73231

A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

Engine oil filler cap*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).B

C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

D Battery. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 248).

Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 159).E

Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F

G Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 183).

Engine oil dipstick*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).H

I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 182).
J Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 181).

The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST SCTI (MI4)

A B C D E J I H G F

E124921

A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

Engine oil filler cap*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).B

C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).
D Battery. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 248).

Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 159).E

Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F

G Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 183).

Engine oil dipstick*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).H

I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 182).

J Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 181).

^1 The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.3L DURATEC-HE (MI4)

A B C D E J I H G F

E81313

A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

Engine oil filler cap*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).B

C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

D Battery. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 248).

Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 159).E

Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F

G Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 183).

Engine oil dipstick*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).H

I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 182).
J Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 181).

The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATORQ-TDCI (DV) DIESEL

A B C D E J I H G F

E135199

A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

Engine oil filler cap*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).B

C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 248).D

Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 157).E

Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F

G Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 183).

Engine oil dipstick*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).H

I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 182).

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 181).J

^1 The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

A B C D E J I H G F

E73234

A B C D E J I H G F

E124913

A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

Engine oil filler cap*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).B

C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

D Battery. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 248).

Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 159).E Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.F

G Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 183).

Engine oil dipstick*. See Engine Oil Check (page 181).H

I Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 182).

Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 181).J

The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

A B C D E J I H G F

E87715

A Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive): See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

Engine oil filler cap*: See Engine Oil Check (page 181).B

C Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive): See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page 182).

Battery: See Vehicle battery (page 248).D

Engine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 157).E

Air cleaner: No maintenance necessary.F

Washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check (page 183).G

Engine oil dipstick*: See Engine Oil Check (page 181).H

Power steering fluid reservoir: See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 182).

Engine coolant reservoir: See Engine Coolant Check (page 181).J

^1 The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6L DURATEC-16VTI-VCT (SIGMA)

A B E95540

A MIN

B MAX

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6L ECOBOOST SCTI (SIGMA)

A B

E134114

A MIN

B MAX

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L DURATEC-HE (MI4)/2.3L DURATEC-HE (MI4)

A B E92036

A MIN

B MAX

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L ECOBOOST SCTI (MI4)

A B

E124917

A B

E134040

A MIN

B MAX

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6L DURATORQ-TDCI (DV) DIESEL/2.0LDURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL/2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

A B E95543

A MIN

B MAX

ENGINE OIL CHECK

CAUTION

Do not use oil additives or other engine treatments. Under certain conditions, they could damage the engine.

Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately 5000 kilometers (3000 miles).

Checking the oil level

CAUTION

Make sure that the level is between the MIN and the MAX marks.

Note: Check the level before starting the engine.

Note: Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground.

Note: Oil expands when it is hot. The level may therefore extend a few millimeters beyond the MAX mark.

Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level.

If the level is at the MIN mark, top up immediately.

Topping up

WARNINGS

Only top up when the engine is cold. If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes for the engine to cool down.

Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running.

Remove the filler cap.

WARNING

Do not top up further than the MAX mark.

Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately.

Top up with fluid that meets the Ford specification. See Technical Specifications (page 183).

Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK

Checking the coolant level

WARNING

Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with y of water and contact your doctor.

CAUTION

Make sure that the level is between the MIN and the MAX marks.

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may therefore extend beyond the MAX mark.

If the level is at the MIN mark, top up immediately.

Topping up

WARNINGS

Only top up when the engine is cold. If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes for the engine to cool down.

Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running.

Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is hot. Wait for the engine to cool down.

Undiluted coolant is flammable and may ignite if spilt on a hot exhaust.

CAUTIONS

In an emergency, you can add just water to the cooling system to reach a vehicle service station. Have the em checked by a properly trained nician as soon as possible.

Prolonged use of incorrect dilution of the coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or zing.

Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape slowly as you unscrew the cap.

CAUTION

Do not top up further than the MAX mark.

Top up with a 50/50 mixture of coolant and water using fluid that meets the Ford specification. See Technical Specifications (page 183).

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID CHECK

WARNINGS

Use of any fluid other than the recommended brake fluid may reduce brake efficiency and not meet its performance standards.

Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with y of water and contact your doctor.

If the level is at the MIN mark, have the system checked by a properly trained technician as soon as ble.

Note: Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure.

Note: The brake and the clutch systems are supplied from the same reservoir.

Top up with fluid that meets the Ford specification. See Technical Specifications (page 183).

POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK

WARNING

Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with y of water and contact your doctor.

Maintenance

CAUTION

Make sure that the level is between the MIN and the MAX marks.

If the level is at the MIN mark, top up immediately.

Topping up

Remove the filler cap.

CAUTION

Do not top up further than the MAX mark.

Top up with fluid that meets the Ford specification. See Technical Specifications (page 183).

WASHER FLUID CHECK

Note: The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same reservoir.

When topping up, use a mixture of washer fluid and water to help prevent freezing in cold weather and improve the cleaning capability. We recommend that you use only high quality washer fluid.

For information on fluid dilution, refer to the product instructions.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Vehicle fluids

Note: Use fluids which meet the specifications or requirements defined. Use of other fluids may lead to damage which is not covered by your Warranty.

	SpecificationItem	Viscosity Grade	Recommended fluid
Engine oil - gasoline engines only			Castrol or Ford Engine Oil5W-20'
Alternative engine oil - all gasoline engines			Castrol or Ford Engine Oil5W-30'
Engine oil - diesel engines			Castrol or Ford Engine Oil5W-30'
		-WSS-M9/B44-DAntifreeze	Motorcraft SuperPlus Anti-freeze

Maintenance

	SpecificationItem	Viscosity Grade	Recommended fluid
Brake fluid	WSS-M6C65-A2 or ISO 4925 Class 6	-	Motorcraft or Ford DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid
			Ford Power Steering Fluid-WSS-M2

Your engine has been designed to be used with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which gives a fuel economy benefit whilst maintaining the durability of your engine.

Topping up the oil: If you are unable to find an oil that meets the specification defined by WSS-M2C913-C or WSS-M2C948-B (gasoline engines only), you must use SAE 5W-30 that meets the specification defined by ACEA A5/B5.

Using topping up oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emission levels.

Castrol engine oil recommended.

Castrol

Capacities

		Capacity in Liters (gallons)ItemVaria
		MAX markPower steering sys
All	Windshield and rear window washer system	3.8 (0.8)
		70 (15.4)Fuel tankAll
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT	Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter	4.1 (0.9)
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT	Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter	3.8 (0.8)
		6 (1.3)Engine cooling syste
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)	Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter	4.1 (0.9)
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)	Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter	3.8 (0.8)

Maintenance

		Capacity in Liters (gallons) Item Va
		6.5 (1.4)Engine cooling s
2.0L Duratec-HE	Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter	4.3 (1.0)
2.0L Duratec-HE	Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter	3.9 (0.9)
		6.2 (1.4)Engine cooling s
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi	Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter	5.4 (1.2)
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi	Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter	5.1 (1.1)
		approx. 6.9 (1.5)Engine cooli
2.3L Duratec-HE	Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter	4.3 (1.0)
2.3L Duratec-HE	Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter	3.9 (0.9)
		6.9 (1.5)Engine cooling s
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi	Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter	3.8 (0.8)
1.6L Duratorq-TDCi	Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter	3.5 (0.8)
		7.3 (1.6)Engine cooling s
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi	Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter	5.5 (1.2)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi	Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter	5 (1.1)
		8.1 (1.8)Engine cooling s
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi	Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter	6 (1.3)
2.2L Duratorq-TDCi	Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter	5.4 (1.2)
		8.4 (1.9)Engine cooling s

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR

WARNING

If you use a car wash with a waxing cycle, make sure that you remove the wax from the windshield.

CAUTIONS

Prior to using a car wash facility check the suitability of it for your vehicle.

Some car wash installations use water at high pressure. This could damage certain parts of your vehicle.

Remove the aerial before using an automatic car wash.

Switch the heater blower off to prevent contamination of the fresh air filter.

We recommend that you wash your vehicle with a sponge and lukewarm water containing a car shampoo.

Cleaning the headlamps

CAUTIONS

Do not scrape the headlamp lenses or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or chemical solvents to clean them.

Do not wipe the headlamps when they are dry.

Cleaning the rear window

CAUTION

Do not scrape the inside of the rear window or use abrasives or chemical solvents to clean it.

Use a clean, lint free cloth or a damp chamois leather to clean the inside of the rear window.

Cleaning the chrome trim

CAUTION

Do not use abrasives or chemical solvents. Use soapy water.

Cleaning the alloy wheels

Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to warm or hot wheel rims and covers.

Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over a period time.

Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.

Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. This will reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings.

Note: Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims and covers.

Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain their condition we recommend that you:

- Clean them weekly with the recommended wheel and tire cleaner.

- Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation.

- Rinse them thoroughly with a pressurized stream of water when you have completed the cleaning process.

We recommend that you use Ford service wheel cleaner. Make sure that you read and follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Using other non-recommended cleaning products can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage.

Body paintwork preservation

CAUTIONS

Do not polish your vehicle in strong sunshine.

Do not allow polish to touch plastic surfaces. It could be difficult to remove.

Do not apply polish to the windshield or rear window. This could cause the wipers to become noisy and they may clear the window properly.

We recommend that you wax the paintwork once or twice a year.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

Safety belts

WARNINGS

Do not use abrasives, or chemical solvents to clean them.

Do not allow moisture to penetrate the safety belt retractor mechanism.

Clean the safety belts with interior cleaner or water applied with a soft sponge. Let the safety belts dry naturally, away from artificial heat.

Instrument cluster screens, LCD screens, radio screens

WARNING

Do not use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or chemical solvents to clean them.

Rear windows

CAUTIONS

Do not use any abrasive materials to clean the interior of the rear windows.

Do not install stickers or labels to the interior of the rear windows.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE

CAUTION

Remove apparently harmless looking substances from the paintwork immediately (e.g. bird droppings, trees, insect remains, tar spots, road salt industrial fall out).

You should repair paintwork damage caused by stones from the road or minor scratches as soon as possible. A choice of products is available from your Ford Dealer. Read and follow the manufacturer's instructions.

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONS

Use only approved wheel and tire sizes. Using other sizes could damage the vehicle and will make the National Type Approval invalid.

If you change the diameter of the tires from that fitted at the factory, the speedometer may not display the correct speed. Take the vehicle to your dealer to have the engine management system reprogrammed.

If you intend to change the size of the wheels from that fitted at the factory, check the suitability with your dealer.

Note: Check your tire pressures regularly to optimize fuel economy.

A decal with tire pressure data is located in the driver's door opening at the B-pillar. Check and set the tire pressure at the ambient temperature in which you are intending to drive the vehicle and when the tires are cold.

TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT

Your vehicle may not have a spare tire. Therefore you will have an emergency kit which will only repair one flat tire.

The kit is located in the spare wheel well.

General information

WARNINGS

Depending on the type and extent of tire damage, some tires can only be partially sealed or not sealed at all. Loss of tire pressure can affect vehicle handling, leading to loss of vehicle control.

Do not use the kit on a previously damaged tire, for example when it has been driven under inflated.

WARNINGS

Do not use the kit on run flat tires.

Do not try to seal damage to the tire's sidewall.

The kit seals most tire punctures [with a diameter of up to six millimeters (1/4 inch)] to temporarily restore mobility.

Observe the following rules when using the kit:

• Drive with caution and avoid making sudden steering or driving maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or you are towing a trailer.
  •The kit will provide you with an emergency temporary repair, enabling you to continue your journey to the next vehicle or tire dealer, or to drive a maximum distance of 200 kilometers (125 miles).
• Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
• Keep the kit out of the reach of children.
• Only use the kit when the ambient temperature is between -40^ (-40^) and +70^ (+158^) .

Using the kit

WARNINGS

Compressed air can act as an explosive or propellant.
Never leave the kit unattended while in use.

CAUTION

Do not keep the compressor operating for more than 10 minutes.

Note: Use the kit only for the vehicle with which it was supplied.

• Park your vehicle at the roadside so that you do not obstruct the flow of traffic and so that you are able to use the kit without being in danger.
• Apply the parking brake, even if you have parked on a level road, to make sure that the vehicle will not move.
• Do not attempt to remove foreign objects like nails or screws penetrating the tire.
• Leave the engine running while the kit is in use, but not if your vehicle is in an enclosed or poorly ventilated area (for example, inside a building). In these circumstances, switch the compressor on with the engine turned off.
• You must replace the sealant bottle with a new one before the expiry date (see top of bottle).
• Inform all other users of your vehicle that the tire has been temporarily sealed with the kit. Make them aware of the special driving conditions to be observed.

Inflating the tire

WARNINGS

Check the sidewall of the tire prior to inflation. If there are any cracks, bumps or similar damage, do not

attempt to inflate the tire.

Do not stand directly beside the tire while the compressor is pumping.

Watch the sidewall of the tire. If any cracks, bumps or similar damage appear, turn off the compressor and

let the air out by means of the pressure relief valve B. Do not continue driving with this tire.

WARNINGS

The sealant contains natural rubber latex. Avoid contact with skin and clothing. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water. Consult a physician if you experience an adverse reaction.

If the tire inflation pressure does not reach 1.8 bar (26 psi) within 10 minutes, the tire may have suffered excessive damage, making a temporary repair impossible. In this case, do not continue driving with this tire.

Screwing the bottle onto the bottle holder will pierce the seal of the bottle. Do not unscrew the bottle from the holder as the sealant will escape.

K J A I H 50 80 G B C D E F E94973

Protective capA

Pressure relief valveB

HoseC

Orange capD

Bottle holderE

Pressure gaugeF

Power plug with cableG

Compressor switchH

Label

Bottle lidJ

Sealant bottleK

1. Open the lid of the tire repair kit.

2. Peel off the label I showing the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) from the casing and attach it to the instrument panel in the driver's field of view. Make sure the label does not obscure anything important.

3. Take the hose C and the power plug with cable G out of the kit.

4. Unscrew the orange cap D and the bottle lid J.

5. Screw the sealant bottle K clockwise into the bottle holder E fully tight.

6. Remove the valve cap from the damaged tire.

7. Detach the protective cap A from the hose C and screw the hose C firmly onto the valve of the damaged tire.

8. Make sure that the compressor switch H is in position 0.

9. Insert the power plug G into the cigar lighter socket or auxiliary power socket. See Cigar Lighter (page 219). See Auxiliary Power Points (page 220).

10. Start the engine.

11. Move the compressor switch H to position 1.

12. Inflate the tire for no longer than 10 minutes to an inflation pressure of minimum 1.8 bar (26 psi) and a maximum of 3.5 bar (51 psi). Move the compressor switch H to position O and check the current tire pressure with pressure gauge F.

Note: When pumping in the sealant through the tire valve, the pressure may rise up to 6 bar (87 psi) but will drop again after about 30 seconds.

Note: After you have switched the compressor off, you may hear air escaping from the damaged tire. This is normal and can be ignored provided that the specified minimum tire pressure has been reached.

1. Remove the power plug G from the cigar lighter socket or auxiliary power socket.
2. Quickly unscrew the hose C from the tire valve and replace the protective cap A. Fasten the valve cap again.

Note: Some residual sealant fluid may drip or spray out of hose C while you are disconnecting it. This is normal.

1. Leave the sealant bottle K in the bottle holder E.
2. Make sure the kit, the bottle lid and the orange cap are stored safely, but still easily accessible in the vehicle. The kit will be required again when you check the tire pressure.
3. Immediately drive approximately three kilometers (two miles) so that the sealant can seal the damaged area.

WARNING

If you experience heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behavior or noises while driving, reduce your speed and drive with caution to a place where it is safe for you to stop the vehicle. Recheck the tire and its pressure. If the tire pressure is less than 1.3 bar (19 psi) or if there are any cracks, bumps or similar damage visible, do not continue driving with this tire.

Checking the tire pressure

1. Stop the vehicle after driving approximately three kilometers (two miles). Check, and where necessary, adjust the pressure of the damaged tire.

2. Attach the kit and read the tire pressure from the pressure gauge F.

3. If the pressure of the sealant-filled tire is 1.3 bar (19 psi) or more, adjust it to the specified pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 199).

4. Follow the inflation procedure once again to top up the tire.
5. Check the tire pressure again from the pressure gauge F. If the tire pressure is too high, deflate the tire to the specified pressure using the pressure relief valve B.
6. Once you have inflated the tire to its correct tire pressure, move the compressor switch H to position 0, remove the power plug G from the socket, unscrew the hose C, fasten the valve cap and replace the protective cap A.
7. Leave the sealant bottle K in the bottle holder E and store the kit away safely in its original location.
8. Drive to the nearest tire specialist to get the damaged tire replaced. Before the tire is removed from the rim, inform your tire dealer that the tire contains sealant. You must renew the sealant bottle K and hose C as soon as possible once used.

Note: Remember that this kit only provides temporary mobility. Regulations concerning tire repair after usage of tire repair kit may differ from country to country. You should consult a tire specialist for advice.

WARNING

Before driving, make sure the tire is adjusted to the recommended inflation pressure. See Technical

Specifications (page 199). Monitor the tire pressure until the sealed tire is replaced.

Empty sealant bottles can be disposed of together with normal household waste. Return remains of sealant to your dealer or dispose of it in compliance with local waste disposal regulations.

TIRE CARE

E70415

To make sure the front and rear tires of your vehicle wear evenly and last longer, we recommend that you swap the tires from front to rear and vice versa at regular intervals of between 5000 and 10000 kilometers (3000 and 6000 miles).

CAUTION

Do not scrub the sidewalls of the tires when you are parking.

If you have to mount a curb, do so slowly and approach it with the wheels at right-angles to the curb.

Examine the tires regularly for cuts, foreign objects and uneven wear of the tread. Uneven wear could mean that the wheel alignment is outside specification.

Check the tire pressures (including the spare) when cold, every two weeks.

USING WINTER TIRES

CAUTION

Make sure that you use the correct lug nuts for the type of wheel the winter tires are fitted to.

If winter tires are used, make sure that the tire pressures are correct. See Technical Specifications (page 199).

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNINGS

Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph).

Do not use snow chains on snow-free roads.

Only fit snow chains to specified tires. See Technical Specifications (page 199).

CAUTION

If your vehicle is fitted with wheel trims, remove them before fitting snow chains.

Note: The ABS will continue to operate normally.

Only use small link snow chains.

Only use snow chains on the front wheels.

Vehicles with stability control (ESP)

Vehicles with stability control (ESP) may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics which can be reduced by switching traction control off. See Using Stability Control (page 137).

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

WARNINGS

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to regularly check the tire pressures.

The system will only provide a low tire pressure warning. It will not inflate the tires.

The system may take longer to detect low pressure in the tires if you have fitted snow chains.

Do not drive on significantly under-inflated tires. This may cause the tires to overheat and fail.

Under-inflation reduces fuel efficiency, tire tread life and may also affect your ability to drive the vehicle safely.

Do not bend or damage the valves when you are inflating the tires.

Have tires installed by properly trained technicians.

Note: After changing the tires or sensors the system will take a few minutes to reset. During this period the system is operational but a warning lamp may appear.

Note: If you fit tires that do not have monitoring sensors, a message will be shown in the display. See Information

Messages (page 88). Confirm this message to deactivate the system.

The system monitors the pressure in the tires using sensors located on the wheels and a receiver located in your vehicle.

When the system detects low pressure in the tires, a warning message is displayed in the information display. See

Information Messages (page 88).

If a low pressure warning message is displayed in the information display, check the tire pressures as soon as possible and inflate them to the recommended pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 199). If this happens frequently, have the cause determined and rectified as soon as possible.

Checking the tire pressures

Note: If the tire pressures are greater than or equal to 3.3 bar (48 lbf/in ^2 ), you will see the + symbol below the pressure value. The system only measures pressure up to 3.3 bar (48 lbf/in ^2 ). The + symbol indicates that the tire pressures may be higher.

Note: Type 3 instrument clusters have a slightly different menu structure. Select Settings first to access Information.

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Information with the up and down buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Tire Pressures with the up and down buttons and press the right arrow button.
4. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting.
5. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display.

Setting the vehicle load

Note: Type 3 instrument clusters have a slightly different menu structure. Select

Settings first to access Setup.

Correct tire pressure settings depend on vehicle load. See Technical

Specifications (page 199). The system can only detect low pressure if you have entered the current vehicle load.

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Tyre Pressures with the up and down buttons and press the right arrow button.
4. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting.
5. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. Hold the left arrow button pressed to return to the trip computer display.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL

Locking lug nuts

You can obtain a replacement locking lug nut key and replacement locking lug nuts from your dealer using the reference number certificate.

Vehicles with a temporary spare wheel

WARNINGS

Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).

Drive the shortest possible distances.

Do not fit more than one spare wheel on your vehicle at any one time.

Do not use snow chains on this type of wheel.

Do not drive through an automatic car wash.

Do not carry out any tire repairs on a temporary spare wheel.

CAUTION

The ground clearance of your vehicle will be reduced. Take care when parking next to a kerb.

Note: Your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics.

Vehicle jack

WARNINGS

The vehicle jack supplied with your vehicle should only be used when changing a wheel in emergency citions.

Before using the vehicle jack, check that it is not damaged or deformed and that the thread is lubricated and from foreign matter.

Never place anything between the jack and the ground, or the jack and the vehicle.

Note: Vehicles with a tire repair kit are not equipped with a vehicle jack or a wheel brace.

It is recommended to use a workshop type hydraulic jack for changing between summer and winter tires.

Note: Use a jack with a minimum lifting capacity of 1.5 tonnes and a lifting plate with a minimum diameter of 80 millimeters (3.1 inches).

Vehicles without tire repair kit

A B C

E86843

JackA

Wheel braceB

Space for locking lug nut keyC

Your vehicle jack and wheel brace are located in the spare wheel well.

Jacking and lifting points

CAUTION

Use only the specified jacking points. If you use other positions, you may damage the body, steering, suspension, engine, braking system or the fuel lines.

Technical diagram of a car showing top and side views with directional arrows indicating motion or assembly, labeled A and B.

E92658

Emergency use onlyA MaintenanceB

A E93184

Indentations in the sills A show the location of the jacking points.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a bracket and inset detail (no visible text or symbols)

Close-up of a mechanical device with a close-up inset showing a component detail (no text or symbols visible)

Vehicles with side skirts

Close-up of a car's side profile showing the wheel and seat area, with no visible text or symbols.

Assembling the wheel brace

Type one

WARNING

When returning the wheel brace extension to its original position, take care not to get your fingers caught.

Note: Make sure that the wheel brace is fully extended.

Metal pipe with pointed tip and arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

E122546

Extend the wheel brace.

Type two

CAUTION

The screw-in towing eye has a left-hand thread. Turn it

counterclockwise to install it. Make sure that the towing eye is fully tightened.

The screw-in towing eye is located in the spare wheel well.

Illustration of a saw tool with directional arrows indicating motion or movement (no text or symbols)

E122502

Insert the screw-in towing eye into the wheel brace.

Removing the wheel trim

Type one

Insert the flat end of the wheel brace between the rim and the trim and carefully remove the trim.

Type two

Technical diagram of a car wheel with labeled parts and an inset showing a close-up view of the wheel's edge details.

E122314

1. Insert the wheel trim remover.
2. Remove the wheel trim.

Note: Make sure that you pull the wheel trim remover at right angles to the trim.

Removing a road wheel

WARNINGS

Park your vehicle in such a position that neither the traffic nor you are hindered or endangered.

Set up a warning triangle.

Make sure that the vehicle is on firm, level ground with the wheels pointing straight ahead.

Switch off the ignition and apply the parking brake.

If your vehicle has a manual transmission, select first or reverse gear. If it has an automatic mission, select park.

Have the passengers leave the vehicle.

Secure the diagonally opposite wheel with an appropriate block or wheel chock.

Make sure that the arrows on directional tires point in the direction of rotation when the vehicle is ing forwards. If you have to fit a spare l with the arrows pointing in the site direction, have the tire refitted in correct direction by a properly trained physician.

Do not work underneath the vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

Make sure that the jack is vertical to the jacking point and the base is flat on the ground.

CAUTION

Do not lay alloy wheels face down on the ground, this will damage the paint.

Note: The spare wheel is located under the floor cover in the luggage compartment.

Close-up of a car wheel with a tool applying force to the rim (no text or symbols visible)

E71948

1. Install the locking lug nut key.
2. Slacken the lug nuts.
3. Jack up the vehicle until the tire is clear of the ground.
4. Remove the lug nuts and the wheel.

Installing a road wheel

WARNINGS

Use only approved wheel and tire sizes. Using other sizes could damage the vehicle and will make the National Type Approval invalid. See Technical Specifications (page 199).

Do not fit run flat tires on vehicles that were not originally fitted with them. Please contact your dealer for details regarding compatibility.

CAUTION

Do not install alloy wheels using lug nuts designed for use with steel wheels.

Note: The lug nuts of alloy wheels and spoked steel wheels can also be used for the steel spare wheel for a short time (maximum two weeks).

Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contact surfaces are free from foreign matter.

Note: Make sure that the cones on the lug nuts are against the wheel.

1. Install the wheel.
2. Install the lug nuts finger tight.
3. Install the locking lug nut key.

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["4"]
    C["3"] --> B["4"]
    D["5"] --> B["4"]
    E["2"] --> B["4"]

E75442

1. Partially tighten the lug nuts in the sequence shown.
2. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
3. Fully tighten the lug nuts in the sequence shown. See Technical Specifications (page 199).
4. Install the hub cap or cover using the ball of your hand.

WARNING

Have the lug nuts checked for tightness and the tire pressure checked as soon as possible.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lug nut torque

	lb.ft (Nm)Wheel type
	103 lb.ft (140 Nm)All

Tire Pressures (Cold Tires)

Up to 80 km/h (50 mph)

	Tire sizeVariant			Full loadNormal load
		ant RearFront	tRearFront
					psi (bar)psi (bar)
	T125/90 R 16All	60 psi(4.1 bar)	60 psi(4.1 bar)	60 psi(4.1 bar)	60 psi(4.1 bar)
Spare wheel when it differs from the other fitted wheels	215/55 R 16	44 psi(3 bar)	44 psi(3 bar)	44 psi(3 bar)	44 psi(3 bar)

Up to 160 km/h (100mph)

	Tire sizeVariant	Full loadNormal load
		RearFront	RearFront
					psi (bar)psi (bar)
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)	205/55 R 16*	32 psi(2.2 bar)	32 psi(2.2 bar)	36 psi(2.5 bar)	42 psi(2.9 bar)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) and 1.6 Duratorq-TDCi (DV)	215/60 R 16*	35 psi(2.4 bar)	32 psi(2.2 bar)	36 psi(2.5 bar)	42 psi(2.9 bar)
2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4) and 2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)	215/55 R 16*	32 psi(2.2 bar)	32 psi(2.2 bar)	36 psi(2.5 bar)	42 psi(2.9 bar)

Wheels and Tires

	Tire sizeVariant			Full loadNormal load
		RearFront	RearFront
					psi (bar)psi (bar)psi
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi (MI4), 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel Stage V, 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi (DW)	215/55 R 16*235/45 R 18	35 psi(2.4 bar)	32 psi(2.2 bar)	36 psi(2.5 bar)	42 psi(2.9 bar)
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi (MI4), 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel Stage V, 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi (DW)	215/50 R 17	35 psi(2.4 bar)	35 psi(2.4 bar)	38 psi(2.6 bar)	42 psi(2.9 bar)
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi (MI4), 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel Stage V, 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi (DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi (DW)	235/40 R 19	35 psi(2.4 bar)	32 psi(2.2 bar)	38 psi(2.6 bar)	44 psi(3 bar)
2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4) and 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4) 235/40 R 19	215/50 R 17235/45 R 18	32 psi(2.2 bar)	32 psi(2.2 bar)	36 psi(2.5 bar)	42 psi(2.9 bar)

* Only use snow chains with a link diameter of 5/8 inch (16 millimeters) or smaller.

**Only use snow chains with a link diameter of 3/8 inch (10 millimeters) or smaller.

Continuous speed in excess of 160 km/h (100 mph)

	Tire sizeVariant			Full loadNormal load
		RearFront	RearFront
					psi (bar)psi (bar)
1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)	205/55 R 16	32 psi(2.2 bar)	32 psi(2.2 bar)	36 psi(2.5 bar)	42 psi(2.9 bar)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) and 1.6 Duratorq-TDCi (DV)	215/60 R 16	36 psi(2.5 bar)	33 psi(2.3 bar)	42 psi(2.9 bar)	45 psi(3.1 bar)
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma), 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4), 2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4) and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel Stage V	215/55 R 16235/40 R 18235/45 R 18235/40 R 19	35 psi(2.4 bar)	32 psi(2.2 bar)	38 psi(2.6 bar)	45 psi(3.1 bar)
1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma), 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4), 2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4) and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel Stage V	215/50 R 17	35 psi(2.4 bar)	35 psi(2.4 bar)	38 psi(2.6 bar)	45 psi(3.1 bar)
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)	215/50 R 17	39 psi(2.7 bar)	36 psi(2.5 bar)	44 psi(3 bar)	48 psi(3.3 bar)
2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)	215/55 R 16235/45 R 18235/40 R 19	36 psi(2.5 bar)	33 psi(2.3 bar)	42 psi(2.9 bar)	46 psi(3.2 bar)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)	215/55 R 16235/45 R 18235/40 R 19	36 psi(2.5 bar)	33 psi(2.3 bar)	42 psi(2.9 bar)	45 psi(3.1 bar)
2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)	215/50 R 17	38 psi(2.6 bar)	35 psi(2.4 bar)	42 psi(2.9 bar)	45 psi(3.1 bar)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Vehicle dimensions

4-door

	Dimension in mm (inches)	Dimension d
	4850 (190.9)	Maximum length -
	4866 (191.6)	Maximum length -
	2092 (82.4)	Overall width inclu
	1460 - 1500 (57.5 - 59.1)	Overall heigh
	2850 (112.2)	Wheelbase
	1579 - 1589 (62.2 - 62.6)	Front track
	1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2)	Rear track

5-door

	Dimension in mm (inches) Dimension d
	4784 (188.3)Maximum length -
	4800 (189)Maximum length - v
	2092 (82.4)Overall width inclu
	1460 - 1500 (57.5 - 59.1)Overall heigh
	2850 (112.2)Wheelbase
	1579 - 1589 (62.2 - 62.6)Front track
	1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2)Rear track

Wagon

	Dimension in mm (inches)	Dimension d
	4837 (190.4)	Maximum length -
	4858 (191.3)	Maximum length -
	2092 (82.4)	Overall width inclu

Capacities and Specifications

	Dimension in mm (inches)	Dimension
	1472 - 1512 (58 - 59.5)	Overall height
	1508 - 1548 (59.4 - 61)	Overall height
	2850 (112.2)	Wheelbase
	1579 - 1589 (62.2 - 62.6)	Front trac
	1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2)	Rear trac

Towing equipment dimensions

A B C D E F G

E87092

203

4-door

		Dimension in mm (inches) Dimension d
		102 (4)Bumper – end of tow ball
		1 (0.04)Attachment point – c
		1150 (45.3)Wheel center – cen
		438 (17.2)Center of tow ball –
		876 (34.5)Inner side of side me
F	Center of tow ball – center 1. attachment point	434 (17.1)
G	Center of tow ball – center 2. attachment point	707 (27.8)

5-door

		Dimension in mm (inches) Dimension d
		100 (3.9) Bumper – end of tow ball
A	Bumper – end of tow ball (with sport bumper)	98 (3.9)
		1 (0.04) Attachment point – c
		1080 (42.5) Wheel center – cer
		438 (17.2) Center of tow ball –
		876 (34.5) Inner side of side me
F	Center of tow ball – center 1. attachment point	364 (14.3)
G	Center of tow ball – center 2. attachment point	637 (25.1)

Wagon

		Dimension in mm (inches)
A	Bumper – end of tow ball (without bumper styling kit)	100 (3.9)
A	Bumper – end of tow ball (with bumper styling kit)	95 (3.7)
A	Bumper – end of tow ball (without bumper styling kit, with self leveling suspension)	113 (4.4)
A	Bumper – end of tow ball (with bumper styling kit, with self leveling suspension)	108 (4.3)
		1 (0.04)
		1135 - 1140 (44.7 - 44.9)
		438 (17.2)
		876 (34.5)
F	Center of tow ball – center 1. attachment point	419 - 429 (16.5 - 16.9)
G	Center of tow ball – center 2. attachment point	692 - 702 (27.2 - 27.6)

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

WARNINGS

Your vehicle has been tested and certified to legislations relating to electromagnetic compatibility (72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 or other applicable local requirements). It is your responsibility to ensure that any equipment you have fitted complies with applicable local legislations. Have any equipment fitted by properly trained technicians.

WARNINGS

The RF (radio frequency) transmitter equipment (e.g. cellular telephones, amateur radio transmitters etc.) may only be fitted to your vehicle if they comply with the parameters shown in the table below. There are no special provisions or conditions for installations or use.

Do not mount any transceiver, microphones, speakers, or any other item in the deployment path of the g system.

Do not fasten antenna cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and brake pipes.

Keep antenna and power cables at least 10 centimeters (4 inches) from any electronic modules and airbags.

1 2 3 4

E85998

Frequency Band MHz	RMS)	Antenna PositionsMaximum output
		3,450 W1 – 30
		1,2,350 W30 – 54
		1,2,350 W68 – 87.5
Frequency Band MHz	RMS)	Antenna PositionsMaximum out
		1, 2, 350 W142 – 176
		1, 2, 350 W380 – 512
		1, 2, 310 W806 – 940
		1, 2, 310 W1200 – 1400
		1, 2, 310 W1710 – 1885
		1, 2, 310 W1885 – 2025

Note: After the installation of RF transmitters, check for disturbances from and to all electrical equipment in the vehicle, both in the standby and transmit modes.

Check all electrical equipment:

-with the ignition ON

-with the engine running

·during a road test at various speeds.

Check that electromagnetic fields generated inside the vehicle cabin by the transmitter installed do not exceed applicable human exposure requirements.

TYPE APPROVALS

FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC ID: WJLRX-42

IC: 7847A-RX42

Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

RX-42 - declaration of conformity

We, the party responsible for compliance, declare under our sole responsibility that the Handset Integration product RX-42 is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at:

www.novero.com/declaration_of_conformity

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Ford Motor Company is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

TYPE APPROVALS

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

TYPE APPROVALS

NAVTEQ ON BOARD™

© 2008 NAVTEQ B.V. All rights reserved.

AT	“© Bundesamt für Eich- und Vermessungswesen”
PL	“© EuroGeographics”
FR	“source: Géoroute® IGN France & BD Carto® IGN France”
DE	“Die Grundlagendaten wurden mit Genehmigung der zuständigen Behörden entnommen”
GB	“Based upon Crown Copyright material.”
GR	“Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”
IT	“La Banca Dati Italiana è stata prodotta usando quale riferimento anche cartografia numerica ed al tratto prodotta e fornita dalla Regione Toscana.”
NO	“Copyright © 2000; Norwegian Mapping Authority”
PT	“Source: lgeoE - Portugal”
ES	“Información geográfica propiedad del CNIG”
SE	“Based upon electronic data © National Land Survey Sweden.”
CH	“Topografische Grundlage: © Bundesamt für Landestopographie”

TYPE APPROVALS

EU Declaration

Hereby, Valeo declares that this short range device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Certificate for United Arab Emirates

Do not modify the front of your vehicle in any way. This could adversely affect deployment of the gs.

Original text according to ECE R94.01: Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on t protected by an airbag in front of it!

Wear a safety belt and keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Only when you use the safety belt properly, can it hold you in a position that allows the airbag to achieve its optimum effect. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 111).

Have repairs to the steering wheel, steering column, seats, airbags and safety belts carried out by a properly led technician.

Keep the areas in front of the airbags free from obstruction. Do not affix anything to or over the airbag covers.

Do not poke sharp objects into areas where airbags are fitted. This could damage and adversely affect payment of the airbags.

Use seat covers designed for seats with side airbags. Have these fitted by a properly trained technician.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.

Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a damp cloth.

Driver and front passenger airbags

30° 30°

E74302

The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal collisions or collisions that are up to 30 degrees from the left or the right. The airbags will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupants, thus cushioning forward body movement. During minor frontal collisions, overturns, rear collisions and side collisions, the driver and front passenger airbags will not deploy.

Driver knee airbag

CAUTION

Do not attempt to open the driver knee airbag cover.

The driver knee airbag will deploy during frontal collisions or collisions that are up to 30 degrees from the left or the right. The airbag will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupants, thus providing a cushion between the driver's knees and the steering column. During overturns, rear collisions and side collisions, the knee airbag will not deploy.

For item location: See At a Glance (page 9)..

Note: The knee airbag has a lower deployment threshold than the front airbags. During a minor collision, it is possible that only the knee airbag deploys.

Side airbags

AIRBAG 2658

E72658

Side airbags are fitted inside the seatback of the front seats. A label indicates that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle.

The side airbags will deploy during significant lateral collisions. The airbags will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupants, thus providing protection for the chest and shoulder areas. During minor lateral collisions, overturns, front collisions and rear collisions, the side airbags will not deploy.

Curtain airbags

Top-down schematic of a car showing internal components and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Curtain airbags are fitted inside the trim panels over the front and rear side windows. Moulded badges in the B-pillar trim panels indicate that curtain airbags are fitted to your vehicle.

The curtain airbags will deploy during significant lateral collisions. The airbag will inflate within a few thousandths of a second and deflate on contact with the occupants, thus providing protection for the head. During minor lateral collisions, front collisions, rear collisions, or overturns the curtain airbags will not deploy.

Safety belts

WARNINGS

Wear a safety belt and keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Only when you use the safety belt properly, can it hold you in a position to achieve its optimum effect. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 111).

Never use a safety belt for more than one person.
Use the correct buckle for each safety belt.
Do not use a safety belt that is slack or twisted.
Do not wear thick clothing. The safety belt must fit tightly around your body to achieve its optimum effect.
Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the centre of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.

The driver and front passenger safety belt retractors are fitted with a safety belt pretensioner. Safety belt pretensioners have a lower deployment threshold than the airbags. During minor collisions, it is possible that only the safety belt pretensioners will deploy.

Status after a collision

WARNING

Safety belts subjected to strain, as a result of an accident, should be renewed and the anchorages led by a properly trained technician.

FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS

WARNING

Insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear a distinct click. You have not fastened the safety belt properly do not hear a click.

3D illustration of a car seatbelt with purple belt and black buttons, no text or symbols present

E74124

3D illustration of a car backseat with purple and black seatbelt straps attached (no text or symbols)

E85817

Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if you pull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope.

Press the red button on the buckle to release the belt. Let it retract completely and smoothly.

SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

3D rendered mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a specific part (no text or symbols visible)

E87511

Note: Lifting the slider slightly while pressing the locking button makes it easier to release the locking mechanism.

To raise or lower, press the locking button on the adjuster and move as necessary.

BELT MINDER

WARNING

The occupant protection system will only provide optimum protection when you use the safety belt properly.

The safety belt minder warning lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the driver's or front seat passenger's safety belt has not been fastened and the vehicle exceeds a relatively low speed. It will also illuminate if the driver's or front seat passenger's safety belt is unfastened when the vehicle is moving. The audible warning and warning lamp will go off after seven minutes.

Deactivating the safety belt minder

See your dealer.

USING SAFETY BELTS DURING PREGNANCY

Two identical illustrations of a seated human figure in a seatbelt, viewed from the side (no text or symbols)

E68587

WARNING

Position the safety belt correctly for your safety and that of your unborn child. Do not use only the lap strap the shoulder strap.

Position the lap strap comfortably across your hips and low beneath your pregnant abdomen. Position the shoulder strap between your breasts, above and to the side of your pregnant abdomen.

DISABLING THE PASSENGER AIRBAG

WARNING

Make sure that the passenger airbag is disabled when using a rearward facing child restraint on the frontenger seat.

AIRBAG OFF ON 2U5A-14B372-AA

E71313

Fitting the passenger airbag deactivation switch

WARNING

If you need to fit a child restraint on a seat protected by an operational airbag in front of it, have a passenger bag deactivation switch fitted. Ask your car for further information.

Note: The key switch is located in the glove compartment with an airbag deactivation lamp in the instrument panel.

If the airbag warning lamp illuminates or flashes when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 71). Remove the child restraint and have the system checked immediately.

Disabling the passenger airbag

PASS AIRBAG OFF ON A B

E71312

DisabledA EnabledB

Turn the switch to position A.

When you switch the ignition on, check that the passenger airbag deactivation warning lamp illuminates.

Enabling the passenger airbag

WARNING

Make sure that the passenger airbag is enabled when you are not using a child restraint on the front passenger

seat.

Turn the switch to position B.

The engine immobilizer is a theft protection system that prevents someone from starting the engine with an incorrectly coded key.

CODED KEYS

Note: Do not shield your keys with metal objects. This may prevent the receiver from recognizing your key as a valid one.

Note: Have all of your remaining keys erased and recoded if you lose a key. Ask your dealer for further information. Have replacement keys recoded together with your existing keys.

If you lose a key, you can obtain a replacement from your Ford Dealer. If possible, provide them with the key number from the tag provided with the original keys. You can also obtain additional keys from your Ford Dealer.

ARMING THE ENGINE IMMOBILIZER

The engine immobilizer is armed automatically a short time after you have switched the ignition off.

DISARMING THE ENGINE IMMOBILIZER

The engine immobilizer is disarmed automatically when you switch the ignition on with a correctly coded key.

If the message Immobiliser active appears in the information display, your key has not been recognized. Remove the key and try again.

If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, this indicates a malfunction. The message Immobiliser active will appear in the information display when you switch on the ignition. Have the immobilizer checked immediately.

Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following alarm systems:

• Perimeter alarm.
• Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.
• Category one alarm with interior sensors and battery back-up sounder.
• Category one alarm with interior sensors, battery back-up sounder and tilt sensors.

Perimeter alarm

The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against unauthorized access to your vehicle through the doors and the hood. It also protects the audio unit.

Interior sensors

Vehicles without overhead console

Top-down view of a car rear bumper with three side panels and two black arrows pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols)

E71401

Vehicles with overhead console

Top-down view of a car's front bumper with two black arrows pointing to the dashboard area (no text or symbols)

E131656

WARNING

The sensors must not be covered up. Do not activate the alarm with full guard if any persons, animals or other moving objects are inside the vehicle.

The sensors act as a deterrent against unauthorized intrusion by sensing any movement within the vehicle.

Battery back-up sounder

The battery back-up sounder is an extra alarm system which will sound a siren when the alarm is triggered. It is armed directly when you lock the vehicle. The sounder has its own battery and will sound an alarm siren even if someone disconnects the vehicle battery or the battery back-up sounder itself.

Tilt sensors

The tilt sensors detect if someone attempts to steal a wheel or tow the vehicle away by sensing changes in the inclination of the vehicle.

Note: When traveling on a ferry with the alarm armed, deactivate the tilt sensors by selecting reduced guard. This will prevent the alarm from being triggered by the movement.

Triggering the alarm

Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any of the following ways:

• If someone opens a door, the tailgate or the hood without a valid key or remote control.
• If someone removes the audio or navigation system.
• If the ignition is turned to position I, II or III without a valid key.

• If the interior sensors detect movement within the vehicle.

• On vehicles with a battery back-up sounder, if someone disconnects the vehicle battery or the battery back-up sounder itself.

• If the tilt sensors detect a change in the inclination of the vehicle.

If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn will sound for 30 seconds and the hazard warning flasher will flash for five minutes.

Any further attempts to perform one of the above will trigger the alarm again.

Full and reduced guard

Full guard

Full guard is the standard setting.

In full guard, the interior and tilt sensors are activated when you arm the alarm.

Note: This may result in false alarms if animals or moving objects are inside the vehicle or, on vehicles with tilt sensors, when traveling on a ferry.

Note: False alarms can also be triggered by the auxiliary heater. See Auxiliary Heater (page 104). If you are using the auxiliary heater, direct the air flow towards the footwell.

Reduced guard

In reduced guard, the interior and tilt sensors are deactivated when you arm the alarm.

Note: You can set the alarm to reduced guard for the current ignition cycle only. The next time you switch on the ignition, the alarm will be reset to full guard.

Ask on Exit

You can set the information display to ask you each time which level of guard you wish to set.

If you select Ask on Exit, the message Reduced guard? appears in the instrument cluster display each time you switch the ignition off.

If you wish to arm the alarm with reduced guard, press the OK button when this message appears.

If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard, leave the vehicle without pressing the OK button.

Selecting full or reduced guard

Note: Selecting Reduced does not set the alarm permanently to reduced guard. It sets it to reduced guard only for the current ignition cycle. If you regularly set the alarm to reduced guard, select Ask on Exit.

Close-up of a car dashboard control panel with a 'OK' button and directional arrows (no text or symbols beyond the 'OK')

E70499

Alarm

Full Guard

O Reduced

□Ask on Exit

E74509

Alarm ◎Full Guard ○Reduced □Ask on Exit

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.
2. Highlight Setup with the up and down arrow buttons and press the right arrow button.
3. Highlight Alarm and press the right arrow button.
4. Highlight Reduced or Full guard. If you prefer to be asked each time you switch off the ignition, select Ask on Exit.
5. Press the OK button to confirm the selection.
6. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. To return to the trip computer display directly, hold the left arrow button pressed.

Information messages

See Information Messages (page 88).

ARMING THE ALARM

To arm the alarm, lock the vehicle. See Locks (page 32).

DISARMING THE ALARM

Vehicles without keyless entry

Perimeter alarm

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors with the key and switching the ignition on with a correctly coded key, or unlocking the doors or the luggage compartment lid with the remote control.

Category one alarm

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors with the key and switching the ignition on with a correctly coded key within 12 seconds, or unlocking the doors or the luggage compartment lid with the remote control.

Vehicles with keyless entry

Note: A valid passive key must be located within the detection range of that door for keyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 34).

Perimeter alarm

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors and switching the ignition on, or unlocking the doors or the luggage compartment lid with the remote control.

Category one alarm

Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking the doors and switching the ignition on within 12 seconds, or unlocking the doors or the luggage compartment lid with the remote control.

SUN SHADES

Pull the blind up and attach it to the hooks (A).

Side windows

A A E74809

Rear window

Top-down view of a vehicle dashboard with labeled points A and an upward arrow indicator (no text or symbols beyond labels)

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER

Close-up of a car dashboard control panel with rotary buttons and a purple function button (no text or symbols visible)

E70723

CLOCK

Note: Some navigation systems will automatically set the date and time on the clock using GPS signals.

Note: See General Information (page 75).

1. From the main menu, select the clock function.
2. Select the option required.
3. Press OK.
4. Using the right, left, up and down arrow buttons, select and change the value.
5. Press OK.

CIGAR LIGHTER

CAUTIONS

If you use the socket when the engine is not running, the battery may discharge.
Do not hold the cigar lighter element pressed in.

Note: Switch the ignition on to use the cigar lighter. You can also use it for up to 30 minutes after you have switched the ignition off.

Note: You can use the socket to power 12 volt appliances that have a maximum current rating of 15 Amperes. Use only Ford accessory connectors or connectors specified for use with SAE standard sockets.

3D rendered mechanical knob or knob with a curved arrow pointing to the knob area (no text or symbols)

E72972

Press the element in to use the cigar lighter. It will pop out automatically.

ASHTRAY

Front ashtray

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted internal section and an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

To empty, pull out the complete ashtray.

Rear ashtray

3D rendering of a mechanical component with a highlighted internal part (no text or symbols visible)

E73705

To remove the ashtray, open it, press it down against the spring and remove it.

AUXILIARY POWER POINTS

WARNING

If used when the engine is not running, the battery may discharge.

Note: You can use them with the ignition switched off.

Note: You can use them to power 12 volt appliances that have a maximum current rating of 15 Amperes. Use only Ford accessory connectors or connectors specified for use with SAE standard sockets.

12V

E78056

Locations:

- Center console.

• Luggage compartment.

CUP HOLDERS

WARNING

Do not place hot drinks in the cup holders when the vehicle is moving.

GLOVE BOX

Cooled glove box

Note: You can cool the glove box using air from the air conditioning system.

Mechanical component diagram showing a rotating valve or knob with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

WARNING

Do not drive with any storage compartment lid open. Make sure that you secure the lid before setting

off.

CAUTION

Do not keep heat-sensitive items and liquids in any storage compartment.

Close-up of a mechanical device with an open lid and internal components, no visible text or symbols

E73704

3D rendering of a mechanical device with an open lid and internal components (no visible text or symbols)

E72905

MAP POCKETS

3D rendered image of a computer monitor with a black downward arrow on the screen (no text or symbols)

MEMORY FUNCTION

A B E86768

Seat adjustment controlsA Memory pre-set buttonsB

Up to four different driver's seat and exterior mirror positions can be stored in the memory. Your preferred setting for the reverse mirror dipping feature can also be stored.

Setting a memory pre-set

Passive setting

The vehicle stores the seating and mirror positions for up to four remote controls or passive keys. Next time the vehicle is unlocked, the position of the seat and mirrors will adjust to the last used position.

Each time you turn the ignition off, the current seat and mirror settings are stored on the remote control or passive key used.

Active setting

1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired pre-set button B until a single chime sounds to confirm.

Recalling a stored seat position

Note: To stop seat movement during a recall, press any driver seat adjustment control, any of the memory buttons or any mirror control switch. Seat movement will also stop if you move the vehicle.

Passive recall

Note: If more than one passive key is in range, the memory function will move to the settings of the first key stored.

When you unlock the vehicle with the remote control or pull the driver door handle with a passive key in range, the seat and mirrors will move to the position stored on that remote control or passive key.

Active recall

Press the pre-set button associated with the desired driving position. The seat and mirrors will move to the position stored on that pre-set.

Resetting the memory

If any seat position travel is interrupted (e.g. an obstacle in the way or loss of power supply), you will need to reset the memory.

Note: Make sure all electrical accessories are switched off.

1. Turn the ignition to position II.
2. Operate the seat adjustment control to move the seat in the required direction until it stops. A click will be heard.
3. Release the seat adjustment control and immediately press and hold the switch in the same direction for at least 3 seconds. Keep it held until the seat stops at the mechanical end of its travel and a click is heard.
4. Release the seat adjustment control.
5. Operate the same seat adjustment control in the opposite direction for at least 3 seconds. Keep it held until the seat stops at the mechanical end of its travel and a click is heard.

GLASSES HOLDER

Interior view of a car showing the rearview seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

E131605

CD CHANGER

This is located in the luggage compartment.

AUDIO INPUT JACK

You can find the socket in the glove box or the center console. See Auxiliary input jack (page 272).

USB PORT

You can find the socket in the glove box or the center console. See Connectivity (page 299).

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

When using the floor mats, always make sure the floor mat is properly secured using the appropriate fixings positioned so that it does not interfere the operation of the pedals.

For vehicles with Start-stop the battery requirement is different. It must be replaced by one of exactly same specification as the original.

The system reduces fuel consumption and CO2 emissions by shutting down the engine when the vehicle is idling, for example at traffic lights. The engine will automatically restart when the driver presses the clutch pedal or when required by a vehicle system, for example to recharge the battery.

To obtain maximum benefit from the system, move the gear lever to the neutral position and release the clutch pedal during any stop of longer than three seconds.

USING START-STOP

WARNINGS

The engine may restart automatically if required by the system. See Principle of Operation (e 224).

Switch the ignition off before opening the hood or carrying out any maintenance.

Always switch the ignition off before leaving your vehicle, as the system may have shut down the engine but ignition will still be live.

Note: The system only operates when the engine is warm and the outside temperature is between 0^ C ( 32^ F) and 30^ C ( 86^ F).

Note: If you stall the engine, and then depress the clutch pedal within a couple of seconds, the system will automatically restart the engine.

Note: The Start-stop indicator will illuminate green when the engine shuts down. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 71).

Note: The Start-stop indicator will flash amber, requiring you to select neutral or depress the clutch pedal. In conjunction a message will be shown in the display.

Note: If the system detects a malfunction, it is deactivated. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician.

Note: If you have switched the system off, the switch will be illuminated.

Note: The system is on by default. To switch the system off, press the switch in the instrument panel. The system will only be de-activated for the current ignition cycle. To turn it on, press the switch again. For item location. See At a Glance (page 9).

To stop the engine

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the gear lever to the neutral position.
3. Release the clutch pedal.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.

The system may not shut down the engine under certain conditions, for example:

• To maintain the interior climate.
- Low battery voltage.
• The outside temperature is too low or too high.
• The driver's door has been opened.

- Low engine operating temperature.

- Low brake system vacuum.

- If a road speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) has not been exceeded.

- The driver's safety belt has not been fastened.

To re-start the engine

Note: The gear lever must be in the neutral position.

Depress the clutch pedal.

The system may automatically restart the engine under certain conditions, for example:

- Low battery voltage.

- To maintain the interior climate.

The system assists the driver to drive more efficiently by constantly monitoring characteristics of gear changing, anticipation of traffic conditions and speeds on freeways and open roads.

Note: These efficiency values do not result in a defined fuel consumption figure. It might vary as it is not only related to these driving disciplines but also influenced by many other factors such as short journeys and cold starts.

Note: Frequent short journeys, where the engine does not fully warm up, will also increase fuel consumption.

The value of these characteristics is represented by petals shown in the display, with five petals being the most efficient. The more efficiently you drive, the better the rating, and the better your overall fuel consumption.

Type 1

E121813 A B C

Gear shiftingA

AnticipationB

Efficient speedC

Gear shifting

Using the highest drivable gear appropriate for the road conditions will improve fuel consumption.

Anticipation

Adjusting your vehicle speed and the distance to other vehicles without the need for heavy braking or acceleration will improve fuel consumption.

Efficient speed

Higher speeds use more fuel. Reducing your cruising speed on open roads will improve fuel consumption.

Type 2 and 3

The relevant information will be shown in the display.

USING ECO MODE

The system is accessed using the relevant information display menu. See Information Displays (page 75).

Resetting Eco mode

Reset the average fuel consumption.

Note: New values may take a short time to calculate.

The system makes it easier to pull away when the vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake.

When the system is active, the vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for a short time after you release the brake pedal. During this time, you have time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal and pull away. The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space.

WARNING

The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave the vehicle, always apply the parking

brake and select first or reverse gear.

USING HILL START ASSIST

The system can operate in either automatic or manual mode. If you select automatic mode, the system is activated automatically when the vehicle is on a slope and you press the brake pedal. If you select manual mode, you must activate the system using the brake pedal.

To set the system mode:

Close-up of a car dashboard control panel with a 'OK' button and red directional arrows (no text or symbols beyond the 'OK')

E70499

Hill Launch ○Off ●Auto ○Manual

E74629

1. Press the right arrow button on the steering wheel to enter the main menu.

2. Highlight Setup with the up and down buttons and press the right arrow button.

3. Highlight Hill Launch and press the right arrow button.

4. Highlight the desired setting and press the OK button to confirm the setting. If Off is selected, the system is switched off and cannot be activated either automatically or manually.

5. Press the left arrow button to exit the menu. To return to the trip computer display directly, hold the left arrow button pressed.

Note: When the system is in manual activation mode, only use the system when pulling away uphill on gradients greater than 3%. If the vehicle is on the flat or on a downhill slope, an active system will make it difficult to pull away smoothly.

Activating the system

WARNINGS

You must remain in the vehicle once you have activated the system. Any attempt to leave the vehicle will tivate the system automatically.

The system is active only if the message Hill Launch Assist active is displayed in the information display. During all times you are responsible for controlling the vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required.

You can activate the system only if the following conditions have been met:

• The engine is running.
- The system is switched on (automatic or manual mode).
• The parking brake is fully disengaged.
- On vehicles with manual transmission, the clutch pedal is pressed.
- On vehicles with automatic transmission, the driver door is closed.
- No failure mode is present.

To activate the system in automatic mode:

1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the brake pedal depressed.

2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope and the right driving direction is selected (first gear if the vehicle is pointing uphill, reverse gear if the vehicle is pointing downhill), the system will be activated automatically. Hill Launch Assist active will appear in the display.

3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two to three seconds.
4. Pull away using the accelerator and clutch pedal. The brakes will be released automatically.

To activate the system in manual mode:

1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep the brake pedal depressed.
2. Quickly jab the brake pedal further until Hill Launch Assist active appears in the display. The system is now active.
3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two to three seconds.
4. Pull away using the accelerator and clutch pedal. The brakes will be released automatically.

WARNING

When the system is active and the system detects a failure, the system is deactivated and the message Please use park brake! followed by Hill Launch A. not available will be displayed. The vehicle is still safe to be driven and can be repaired during the next service. The message Hill Launch A. not available will also be displayed with manual activation during a failure or if one of the activation criteria is not met. If you have switched the system off, no messages will be displayed.

Deactivating the system

To deactivate the system, perform one of the following:

• Apply the parking brake.
• Wait for two to three seconds until the system deactivates automatically.
• If a forward gear was selected when the system became active, select reverse gear.
• If reverse gear was selected when the system became active, select a forward gear.

Hill Launch Assist off will appear in the instrument cluster display.

The active suspension provides improved handling, comfort and stability by continuously adjusting the damper properties to the current road and driving conditions. This system in conjunction with the ABS system offers the benefit of potentially shorter stopping distances on rough road surfaces.

Depending on your preferences and driving style, you can choose between three different settings:

Comfort

This provides a softer driving feel.

Normal

Normal setting.

Sport

This provides a harder, sportier ride.

USING ACTIVE SUSPENSION

Selecting a setting

Note: After you select a setting, you may not immediately notice a difference in the vehicle's handling. The effect of the continuously controlled damping depends on the road surface and driving conditions.

Comfort Normal Sport E70475

You can change the setting while driving.

System malfunction

The active suspension system will switch off automatically if it malfunctions. The suspension will be set to a fail-safe condition that will enable you to continue driving but you will not be able to change the suspension setting. Have this checked as soon as possible.

The camera is a visual aid for use when reversing.

WARNING

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

CAUTIONS

If you use a high pressure spray to wash your vehicle, only spray the camera briefly from a distance not than 20 centimeters (8 inches).

Do not apply pressure to the camera.

Note: Keep the camera free from dirt, ice and snow. Do not clean with sharp objects, degreaser, wax or organic products. Use only a soft cloth.

During operation, guide lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle's path and approximate distance from rearward objects.

REAR VIEW CAMERA

WARNINGS

The operation of the camera may vary depending on the ambient temperature, vehicle and road tions.

The distances shown in the display may differ from the actual distance.

Do not place objects in front of the camera.

The camera is located on the luggage compartment lid near the handle.

Close-up of a car rear bumper with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

E99105

Activating the rear view camera

CAUTION

The camera may not detect objects that are close to the vehicle.

With the ignition and the audio unit switched on, engage reverse gear. The image is displayed on the screen.

The camera may not operate correctly in the following conditions:

• Dark areas.
• Intense light.
• If the ambient temperature increases or decreases rapidly.
• If the camera is wet, for example in rain or high humidity.
• If the camera's view is obstructed, for example by mud.

Using the display

CAUTIONS

Obstacles above the camera position will not be shown. Inspect the area behind your vehicle if necessary.

CAUTIONS

Marks are for general guidance only, and are calculated for vehicles in maximum load conditions on an even l surface.

The lines show a projected vehicle path (based on the current steering wheel angle) and the distance from the exterior mirrors and rear bumper.

D E D C C B B A A E99458

A Exterior mirror clearance - 0.1 meter (4 inches) Red - 0.3 meter (12 inches) B Amber - 1 meter (39 inches) C

Amber - 2 meters (79 inches)D

E Amber - center line of the projected vehicle path

Note: When reversing with a trailer, the lines on the screen show the vehicle direction and not the trailer.

Deactivating the rear view camera

Note: Disengage reverse gear. The display will stay on for a short period before switching off.

The system will automatically switch off once the vehicle speed has reached approximately 15 km/h (9 mph).

Vehicles with parking aid

The display will additionally show a coloured distance bar. This guide indicates the distance from the rear bumper to the detected obstacle.

These are colour coded as follows:

- Green - 0.8 to 1.5 meters (31 to 59 inches).

- Amber - 0.3 to 0.8 meter (12 to 31 inches).

- Red - 0.3 meter (12 inches) or less.

The system is not a collision warning or avoidance system. The separate forward alert function provides a collision warning and mitigation feature. See Forward alert function (page 239). You must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.

When driving you are responsible for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when adaptive cruise control is used. You must always pay attention to the traffic conditions and intervene when adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

The system does not brake for slow or stationary vehicles, pedestrians, objects in the road, oncoming and crossing vehicles.

CAUTIONS

Only use adaptive cruise control when conditions are favorable, for example on freeways and main roads with dy free flowing traffic.

Do not use in poor visibility, specifically fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.

Do not use on icy or slippery roads.

Do not use the system when entering or leaving a freeway.

The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations it may detect a vehicle other than the one elected or not detect any vehicle at all.

Note: When adaptive cruise control is activated, you may hear some unusual sounds during automatic braking. This is normal and caused by the automatic braking system.

Note: Keep the front of the vehicle free from dirt, metal badges or objects, including vehicle front protectors and additional lights which may prevent the sensor from operating.

The system is designed to help you maintain a gap from the vehicle ahead or a set road speed if there is no slower vehicle ahead. The system is intended to provide enhanced operation of the vehicle when following other vehicles which are in the same lane and traveling in the same direction.

The system is based on the use of a radar sensor which projects a beam directly forward of the vehicle. This beam will detect any vehicle ahead within the system's range.

The radar sensor is mounted behind the front grille.

Detection beam issues

A

Top-down view of three cars on a road with a spotlight, no text or symbols visible

B

Top-down schematic of a vehicle showing front view and perspective projection (no text or symbols)

Top-down diagram of a road with multiple cars, one highlighted by a light beam (no text or symbols)

E71621

Detection issues can occur:

• With vehicles that edge into your lane that can only be detected once they have moved fully into your lane (A). Motorcycles may be detected late, or not at all. (B)
• With vehicles in front when going into and coming out of a bend (C). The detection beam will not follow sharp curves in the road.

In these cases the system may brake late or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and intervene if necessary.

Automatic braking with ACC

WARNINGS

You must take immediate action once alerted, as the adaptive cruise control braking will not be sufficient to keep a safe distance to the vehicle in front.

In some cases there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed. You should always apply the brakes when necessary.

When following a vehicle in front of you, adaptive cruise control will not automatically decelerate to a stop.

The system will automatically brake for you, if required to maintain the set gap between your vehicle and the one detected in front. This braking capacity is limited to approximately 30% of the total manual braking capacity to ensure smooth and comfortable cruising. If the car needs to brake more heavily than this, and you do not intervene by braking manually, an alarm will sound and a warning symbol will be displayed in the cluster.

USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL

The system is operated by adjustment controls mounted on the steering wheel.

Vehicles without speed limiter

E A CAN B OFF C D

E124908

ACC onA

ACC cancelB

ACC offC

ACC gap increaseD

ACC gap decreaseE

Vehicles with speed limiter

A E CAN B D C

E124909

ACC on/offA

ACC cancelB

Speed limiter on/offC

ACC gap increaseD

ACC gap decreaseE

Switching the system on

Press switch A. The system is set to standby mode.

Setting a speed

Note: The system must be in standby mode.

SET+ F RES SET- G E133884

Set speed increaseF

Set speed decreaseG

Press switch F or switch G to select your desired cruise speed. The speed is displayed in the information display and stored as the set speed.

Changing the set speed

Note: Vehicle speed may be increased and decreased at intervals of 5 km/h or 5 mph.

Note: If the system does not react to these changes the reason may be that the gap interval to the vehicle in front prevents an increase in speed.

SET+ F RES G E133884

Press switch F to increase or switch G to decrease the set speed until the desired set speed is shown in the information display. The vehicle speed will gradually change to the selected speed.

Note: Smaller increases of 1 km/h or 1 mph may be set by pressing switch H.

SET+ RES H SET- E133885

ACC resumeH

Setting the vehicle gap

CAUTION

Use the appropriate gap setting in accordance with local traffic regulations.

Note: The gap setting is time dependant and therefore the distance will automatically adjust with your speed. For example on a gap setting of four bars, the time gap is 1.8 seconds. This will mean that at a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph), the distance to the vehicle in front will be maintained at 50 meters (164 feet).

Note: If the accelerator is depressed for a short period, for example when overtaking, the system is temporarily deactivated and then reactivated when the accelerator pedal is released. A message is displayed in the information display.

Note: The gap setting will remain unchanged during ignition cycles.

Top-down diagram of a car with dashed lane lines indicating road or traffic (no text or symbols)

The distance between you and the vehicle detected in front is maintained by a variable setting. There are five steps which are represented by horizontal bars displayed in the information display. One bar denotes the smallest gap and five bars indicate the largest gap. These bars are shown empty when in standby mode and filled when in active mode.

If no vehicle is detected in front, then only your vehicle is displayed in the information display below the bars. The system will maintain the set speed when conditions permit. The set gap is maintained and displayed.

If a vehicle is detected by the sensor, the display will show another vehicle above the horizontal bars:

E82312

Simple line drawing of a person's head and torso with horizontal stripes (no text or symbols)

This is a follow mode, and the system will accelerate or decelerate as necessary to maintain the set gap.

Press switch E to decrease the gap or switch D to increase the gap. The gap selected will be represented by the number of bars in the display.

Note: The recommended gap setting is four to five bars.

Temporarily deactivating the system

Note: The system is canceled when the gear lever is moved to a neutral position or if the accelerator pedal or clutch is depressed for a long period of time.

Press either the brake or switch B to cancel the system. The system will return to standby mode allowing you full manual control of the vehicle. The set speed and gap setting are retained in the memory.

To resume adaptive cruise control press switch H. The system will resume with the previously set speed and vehicle gap setting if conditions permit.

Switching the system off

Vehicles without speed limiter

Press switch C to turn the system off.

Note: When deactivating the system by pressing switch C, the stored speed is not retained.

Vehicles with speed limiter

Press switch A to turn the system off.

Note: When deactivating the system by pressing switch A, the stored speed is not retained.

Automatic deactivation

Note: If the engine speed drops too low, a message is displayed in the information display instructing you to change down a gear (manual transmission only). If you do not follow this recommendation then the system will go into automatic deactivation mode.

Note: The system will not operate if the electronic stability program (ESP) has been manually switched off.

The system is dependent on various other safety systems, for example ABS and ESP. If any of these systems are malfunctioning or reacting to an emergency, the system is automatically deactivated.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message is displayed in the information display. See Information Messages (page 88). You must then intervene and adapt your driving and speed to vehicles in front.

An automatic deactivation can be due to the:

• vehicle speed falling below 30 km/h (20 mph)
  •wheels losing traction
• brake temperature is high, for example when driving on mountainous or hilly roads
• engine speed is too low
• radar sensor is covered
  •parking brake or electric parking brake (EPB) is applied.

FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION

WARNINGS

Never wait for a collision warning. When driving you are responsible for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the system is used.

The system will only react to vehicles in front traveling in the same direction and will not react to slow or stationary vehicles.

Never drive in a manner to provoke the system. The system is designed to assist in emergencies only.

CAUTIONS

Warnings may be triggered late, be absent or triggered unnecessarily due to detection beam issues. See Principle of Operation (page 234).

The system uses the same radar sensors as adaptive cruise control and therefore has the same limitations. See Principle of Operation (page 234).

Note: The brake support system only reduces the collision speed if you brake immediately once alerted.

Note: If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then braking is implemented with full brake function, even if the force on the pedal is light.

Note: Brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking and the brakes are applied gently, which may be noticed as a slight jerk.

Note: The collision alerts will only occur if the system is switched on, however the brake support is always on and cannot be turned off.

Note: The system may be used with or without the adaptive cruise control system being activated.

The system assists you by warning of the risk of a collision with a vehicle in front.

The system alerts you by warning chimes and a visual warning in the information display. See Information Messages (page 88).

Brake support is activated to enable full braking effectiveness, and reduce the severity of a collision with the vehicle in front.

Switching the system on and off

Note: When the system is switched off, a warning indicator will remain illuminated in the information display. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 71).

Note: The system status and settings will remain unchanged during ignition cycles.

The system can be switched on and off using the information display. See General Information (page 75).

Adjusting the warning sensitivity

You may adjust the system warning sensitivity using the buttons on the steering wheel. See General Information (page 75). This controls how early the visual and audible warning is activated.

When you are going downhill, your speed may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the es but a warning will be given.

The system allows you to set a speed, to which the vehicle then becomes limited. The set speed will become the effective maximum speed of the vehicle, but with the option to temporarily exceed this limit if required.

USING THE SPEED LIMITER

The system is operated by adjustment controls mounted on the steering wheel.

Press button A to switch the system on and off. The information display will prompt for a speed to be set.

Note: The set speed limit can be intentionally exceeded for a short period if required, for example when overtaking.

B A

E124874

Setting the speed limit

Use the cruise control switches to alter the maximum speed setting.

Close-up of a car's seatbelt switch with purple and black buttons, no visible text or symbols

E70615

Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switch to select your desired speed limit. The speed is indicated in the information display and stored as the set speed.

Press button B to cancel the limiter and place it in standby mode. The information display will confirm deactivation by showing the set speed crossed out.

Close-up of a car interior showing a purple key inserted into a black control panel, with an arrow pointing to the purple key (no text or symbols visible)

E70616

Press the RES button to resume the limiter. The information display will confirm the system is active by showing the set speed again.

Intentionally exceeding the speed limit

Depress the accelerator hard close to the full pedal travel and the limit will temporarily deactivate. The system will reactivate once the vehicle speed drops below the set speed.

System warnings

If the set limit is accidentally exceeded the information display will show the set speed flashing together with an audible warning chime.

If the set limit is intentionally exceeded the information display will show the set speed crossed out.

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

At all times you are responsible for controlling the vehicle, supervising the system and intervening if red.

If the sensor becomes blocked the system may not function.

Take regular rest breaks as required and do not wait for the system to warn you if you feel tired.

Take rest breaks only where it is safe to do so.

Certain driving styles and behavior may result in the system issuing a warning even if you are not feeling

CAUTIONS

In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow, spray and large contrasts in ting can all influence the sensor.

The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings.

The system may not operate in areas during roadworks construction.

The system may not operate on roads with sharp bends or narrow lanes.

Do not carry out windshield repairs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor.

If your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us, the system may not function correctly.

Note: Keep the windshield free from obstructions such as bird droppings, insects and snow or ice.

Note: The system is intended as a driver aid when driving on fast main roads and highways.

Note: The system calculates an alertness level at vehicle speeds above approximately 65 km/h (40 mph).

The system automatically monitors your driving behavior using various inputs including the front camera sensor.

If the system detects that you are becoming drowsy or there is a deterioration in your driving, the system will alert you.

USING DRIVER ALERT

Switching the system on and off

Note: The system status will remain unchanged during ignition cycles.

Activate the system using the information display. See Information Displays (page 75).

Once activated the system will calculate your alertness level based upon your driving behavior in relation to the lane markings, and other factors.

System warnings

Note: The system will not issue warnings below approximately 65 km/h (40 mph).

The warning system is in two stages. At first the system issues a temporary warning that a rest should be taken. This message will only appear for a short time. If a rest is not then taken a further warning may be issued which will remain in the information display until canceled. See Information Messages (page 88).

Press OK on the steering wheel control to remove the warning.

System display

When active the system will run automatically in the background and only issue warnings if required. You can view the status at any time using the information display. See General Information (page 75).

The alertness level is shown by six steps as a colored bar.

Simple line icons showing a speedometer and a steaming cup connected by a dashed line (no text or symbols)

E131358

Alertness level is fine, no rest required.

Simple line icons showing a steering wheel and a steaming cup, connected by a dashed line (no text or symbols)

E131359

Alertness level is critical, indicating that a rest should be taken as soon as safely possible.

The status bar will travel from left to right as the calculated alertness level decreases. As the rest icon is approached the color turns from green to yellow and then finally red when a rest break must be taken.

• Green - No rest required.
• Yellow - First (temporary) warning.
• Red - Second warning.

Note: The alertness level will be shown in grey if the camera sensor cannot track the road lane markings or if the vehicle speed drops below approximately 65 km/h (40 mph).

Resetting the system

You can reset the system by either:

• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening and closing the driver's door.

The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention.

At all times you are responsible for controlling the vehicle, supervising the system and intervening if red.

If the sensor becomes blocked the system may not function.

Lane markings may not always be properly tracked by the sensor. Other structures or objects may sometimes be incorrectly detected as a lane marking, resulting in a false or missed warning.

CAUTIONS

In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow, spray and large contrasts in king can all influence the sensor.

The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings.

The system may not operate in areas during roadworks construction.

The system may not operate on roads with sharp bends or narrow lanes.

Do not carry out windshield repairs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor.

If your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us, the system may not function correctly.

Note: Keep the windshield free from obstructions such as bird droppings, insects and snow or ice.

Note: The system is intended as a driver aid when driving on fast main roads and highways.

Note: The system may not operate during hard braking or acceleration and, when you are intentionally steering the vehicle.

Note: The system will operate with a minimum of one tracked lane marking.

Note: The system will only operate above vehicle speeds of approximately 65 km/h (40 mph).

A sensor is mounted behind the interior rear view mirror. It continuously monitors conditions to alert you of unintentional lane drifting at high speeds.

The system will automatically detect and track the lane markings on the road. If it detects that the vehicle is unintentionally drifting towards the lane boundaries then a visual warning will be displayed in the information display. There is also a warning given in the form of a vibration felt through the steering wheel.

USING LANE DEPARTURE WARNING

Switching the system on and off

Note: When the system is switched off, a warning indicator will remain illuminated in the information display. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 71).

Note: The system status and settings will remain unchanged during ignition cycles.

A ON OFF B E131360

System onA

System offB

Activate the system using the switches on the indicator stalk.

Setting the steering wheel vibration level

The system has three intensity levels which can be set using the information display. See General Information (page 75).

Setting the system sensitivity

You can adjust how quickly the system warns you of a dangerous situation. The system has two sensitivity levels which can be set using the information display. See General Information (page 75).

System warnings

Top-down view of a car with no visible text, numbers, or symbols on the vehicle itself

E131363

A column of lane markings is displayed either side of the vehicle graphic.

The lane markings are color coded as follows:

• Green - The system is ready to warn you of any unintentional lane departure.
• Red - The vehicle is approaching or is too close to the detected lane boundary. Take immediate safe action to reposition the vehicle.
• Grey - The relevant lane boundary will be suppressed.

Instances where a lane boundary may be suppressed:

• Lane markings on the road may not be detected by the sensor.

•The direction indicator for that side of the vehicle is on.

- During hard acceleration and braking, or if direct steering is applied.

- Vehicle speed is outside the operating limits

- If there is an ABS or Stability Control (ESP) intervention.

• Narrow lane width.

If the lane markings turn red or a vibration is felt through the steering wheel you must take immediate and safe action to align the vehicle and correct any unintended lane drift.

TOWING POINTS

Towing eye location

The screw-in towing eye is located in the spare wheel well.

The towing eye must always be carried in the vehicle.

Installing the towing eye

CAUTION

The screw-in towing eye has a left-hand thread. Turn it counterclockwise to install it. Make that the towing eye is fully tightened.

Front towing eye

Close-up of a car's side profile with checkered pattern and a knife cutting down the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

E87280

Rear towing eye

Close-up of a car's side profile with tool icons and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Insert your finger into the hole on the underside of the cover and prise off the cover. Install the towing eye.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS

All vehicles

WARNINGS

Switch the ignition on when your vehicle is being towed. The steering lock will engage and the directionators and brake lamps will not work do not.

The brake and steering assistance will not operate unless the engine is running. Press the brake pedal harder allow for increased stopping distances heavier steering.

CAUTIONS

Too much tension in the tow rope could cause damage to your vehicle or the vehicle that is towing.

Do not use a rigid tow bar on the front towing eye.

CAUTIONS

Select neutral when your vehicle is being towed.

Drive off slowly and smoothly without jerking the vehicle that is towing.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

CAUTIONS

If a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph) and a distance of 20 kilometers (12 miles) is to be exceeded the drive wheels t be lifted clear of the ground.

It is recommended not to tow with the drive wheels on the ground. However, if it is required to move the vehicle in a dangerous location, do not tow your uncle faster than 20 km/h (12 mph) or other than 20 kilometers (12 miles).

Do not tow your vehicle backwards.

In the event of a mechanical failure of the transmission the drive wheels must be lifted clear of the ground.

Do not tow your vehicle if the ambient temperature is below 0°C (32°F).

Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.

CAUTIONS

Connect batteries with only the same nominal voltage.

Always use booster cables with insulated clamps and adequate size cable.

Do not disconnect the battery from the vehicle's electrical system.

To connect the booster cables

graph TD
    A["Component A"] -->|Arrow to| B["Component B"]
    B -->|Arrow to| C["Component C"]
    C -->|Arrow to| D["Component D"]
    D -->|Arrow to| A

E102925

Flat battery vehicleA

Booster battery vehicleB

Positive connection cableC

Negative connection cableD

1. Position the vehicles so that they do not touch one another.
2. Switch off the engine and any electrical equipment.
3. Connect the positive (+) terminal of vehicle B with the positive (+) terminal of vehicle A (cable C).
4. Connect the negative (-) terminal of vehicle B to the ground connection of vehicle A (cable D). See Battery connection points (page 249).

CAUTIONS

Do not connect to the negative (−) terminal of the flat battery.

Make sure that the cables are clear of any moving parts and fuel delivery system parts.

To start the engine

1. Run the engine of vehicle B at moderately high speed.
2. Start the engine of vehicle A.
3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of three minutes before disconnecting the cables.

CAUTION

Do not switch on the headlamps when disconnecting the cables. The peak voltage could blow the bulbs.

Disconnect the cables in the reverse order.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

CAUTION

For vehicles with Start-stop the battery requirement is different. It must be replaced by one of exactly same specification as the original.

Note: Where applicable, the audio system must be reprogrammed with the keycode.

The battery is located in the engine compartment. See Maintenance (page 169).

BATTERY CONNECTION POINTS

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with visible components and a black arrow pointing to a specific part (no text or symbols present)

E114494

CAUTION

Do not connect to the negative (−) terminal of the flat battery.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE

Note: The vehicle identification plate design may vary to that shown.

Note: The information shown on the vehicle identification plate is dependant upon market requirements.

A B C D E F G H I E135662

ModelA

VariantB

Engine designationC

Emission levelD

Vehicle identification numberE

Gross vehicle weightF

Gross train weightG

Maximum front axle weightH

Maximum rear axle weightl

The vehicle identification number and maximum weights are shown on a plate located on the lock side of the right-hand door aperture at the bottom.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Top-down view of a car's side panel showing front and rear panels with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

E87496

The vehicle identification number is stamped into the floor panel on the right-hand side, beside the front seat. It is also shown on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.

IMPORTANT AUDIO INFORMATION

WARNINGS

Due to technical incompatibility, recordable (CD-R) and rewritable (CD-RW) discs may not function correctly.

These units will play compact discs that conform to the International Red Book standard audio specification. Copy protected CDs from some manufacturers do not conform to this standard and playback cannot be guaranteed.

Dual format, dual sided discs (DVD Plus, CD-DVD format), adopted by the music industry, are thicker than normal CDs and consequently playback cannot be guaranteed, and jamming could occur. Irregular shaped CDs and CDs with a scratch protection film or self adhesive labels attached should not be used.

Warranty claims, where this type of disc is found to be inside an audio unit returned for repair, will not be accepted.

All units except Sony CD (but not the 6CD) are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm audio compact discs only. The Sony CD unit will play 8 cm discs with a Sony approved adaptor fitted (CSA-8).

The audio unit may be damaged if unsuitable items like credit cards or coins are pushed inside the CD aperture.

Audio unit labels

CLASS 1

LASER PRODUCT

CAUTION—INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

Disc labels

Audio CD

MP3

6000CD

A B C Q CD/AUX P RADIO O SOUND N MENU M 6000 CD VOL ON/OFF L K J I CLOCK TA D E F G H

E141803

CD aperture. See Loading compact discs (page 267).A

B On, off and volume control. See On/off control (page 258).
C CD eject. See Ejecting compact discs (page 269).

Clock. See Setting the clock and date on the audio unit (page 257).D

Traffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 261).E

Folder up.F

Folder down.G

End call. See Telephone (page 274).H

Information. See MP3 display options (page 271).

J Seek up. See Station tuning control (page 262).

K Seek down. See Station tuning control (page 262).

L Station presets. See Station preset buttons (page 260).

Accept call. See Telephone (page 274).M

N Menu. See Audio menu control (page 258).

Bass and treble control. See Bass/treble control (page 258). Balance and fade control. See Balance/fade control (page 258).

P Radio and waveband select. See Waveband button (page 260).

Q Auxiliary and CD select. See Auxiliary input jack (page 272). See Compact Disc Player (page 267).

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB

A B C D E F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 * # S INFO CLOCK G CD/AUX SCAN DSP MENU H R RADIO TIME FAD/BAI TA I Q PHONE ON/OFF J P O N M L K E138370

A Scan. See Station tuning control (page 262). See Compact disc track scanning (page 269).

Information. See MP3 display options (page 271).B

C Station presets. See Station preset buttons (page 260).

CD aperture. See Loading compact discs (page 267).D

Clock. See Setting the clock and date on the audio unit (page 257).E

F DSP select. See Digital signal processing (DSP) (page 264).

Autostore. See Autostore control (page 260).G

Menu. See Audio menu control (page 258).H

Traffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 261).

J On and off control. See On/off control (page 258).

Balance and fade control. See Balance/fade control (page 258).K

End call. See Telephone (page 274).L

Volume control, navigation buttons and select button.M

Accept call. See Telephone (page 274).N

Tone. See Bass/treble control (page 258).O

Phone menu. See Telephone (page 274).P

Q Radio and waveband select. See Waveband button (page 260).

R Auxiliary and CD select. See Auxiliary input jack (page 272). See Compact Disc Player (page 267).

S CD eject. See Ejecting compact discs (page 269).

SECURITY CODE

Each unit incorporates a unique code that must be entered before the unit will operate.

If the battery is disconnected or if the unit has been removed from the vehicle, the code must be re-entered before the unit will operate.

LOST SECURITY CODE

If you lose the unique code, contact your dealer and supply details of your audio unit along with some proof of identity.

ENTERING A SECURITY CODE

If CODE ----, CODE 0000 or ENTER KEYCODE appears in the display when you switch on the audio unit, you must enter the unique code using the station preset buttons.

6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB

1. Using the station preset buttons enter the unique code.
2. If you make a mistake entering the code, re-enter the digits by continuing to select buttons 0-9. The display will advance from digit position 1 to 4 and then back again.
3. Make sure that the complete code is correct before pressing either the * preset button or the button between the navigation buttons to confirm your selection.

INCORRECT SECURITY CODE

Up to a maximum of 10 unique code entry attempts are allowed with various consequences if you get it wrong.

The number of attempts will be shown in the display.

If the display reverts to CODE another entry attempt may be made immediately. If the display shows WAIT30, the unit will be locked for 30 minutes. Wait until the timer counts down to zero. When CODE is shown in the display, enter the correct code.

Note: After 10 incorrect attempts the unit will be permanently inoperative and LOCKED will be shown in the display. See your dealer.

SETTING THE CLOCK AND DATE ON THE AUDIO UNIT

6000CD

Changing the date and time

Press the CLOCK button to display the date and time.

Note: If you do not press another button within 30 seconds of pressing the CLOCK button, the display will return to its previous setting.

1. Using the seek up or seek down button select the date or time value that you wish to change. The selected value will flash in the display.
2. Rotate the volume control to change the selected date or time value.
3. Using the seek up or seek down button select additional date or time values that you wish to change.
4. Rotate the volume control to change the selected date or time value.
5. Press the CLOCK button to exit and save your settings.

Note: If you do not press the CLOCK button within 30 seconds of changing a date or time value, the display will exit and save the new values automatically.

Note: Press and hold the CLOCK button for more than two seconds to automatically select the hour value for winter or summer time adjustment.

12/24 hour format

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until the 12/24 icon is shown in the display.
2. Using the seek up or seek down button select your required setting.
3. Press the MENU button repeatedly or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection.

Sony and Sony DAB

Changing the date and time

1. Press the CLOCK button.
2. Press the left or right navigation button until the date or time value that you wish to change flashes in the display.
3. Using the up or down navigation button change the selected date or time value.
4. Using the left and right navigation buttons select additional date or time values that you wish to change. The selected value will flash in the display.
5. Repeat steps three and four as necessary.
6. Press the CLOCK button or the button between the navigation buttons to exit and save your settings.

12/24 hour format

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Press the up or down navigation button until the 12/24 icon is shown in the display.
3. Using the left or right navigation button select the required setting.
4. Press the MENU button or the button between the navigation buttons to confirm your selection.

ON/OFF CONTROL

Press the on/off control. This will also operate the unit for up to one hour with the ignition turned off.

The radio will switch off automatically after one hour.

BASS/TREBLE CONTROL

The bass function is used to adjust the low-frequency response of the audio unit.

The middle function is used to adjust the mid-frequency response of the audio unit.

The treble function is used to adjust the high-frequency response of the audio unit.

6000CD

Note: The selected level will be shown in the display.

1. Press the SOUND button once for bass, twice for middle or three times for treble.
2. Use the volume control or on some units the seek up or seek down button to make the necessary adjustment.

Sony and Sony DAB

Note: You can adjust these settings separately for CD, Radio and Aux.

Note: The selected level will be shown in the display.

1. Press the TONE button once for bass, twice for middle or three times for treble.
2. Use the up and down navigation buttons to make the necessary adjustment.

BALANCE/FADE CONTROL

The balance function is used to adjust the sound distribution between the left and right speakers.

The fade function is used to adjust the sound distribution from front to rear in vehicles fitted with rear speakers.

6000CD

Press the SOUND button four times for balance or five times for fade.

Use the volume control or on some units the seek up or seek down button to make the necessary adjustment.

Sony and Sony DAB

Press the FAD/BAL button once for fade or twice for balance.

Use the up and down navigation buttons for fade adjustment, and the left and right navigation buttons for balance adjustment.

The selected level will be shown in the display.

AUDIO MENU CONTROL

Use the MENU button to access functions that cannot be selected directly via one of the control buttons. Press the MENU button for first level functions, or press and hold the MENU button for other second level functions (not available on Sony or Sony DAB audio units).

6000CD

Menu functions
			Second levelFirst level
During radio reception	During tape playback	During CD playback	During all functions
		Scan12/24 hour	Merrification or distant
Scan tuning	AVC*	Shuffle	AF**
			REGRepeatADV m
AVC*			NewsComp-
			CLIP12/24 hour-AD
-	-	AVC*	VID
		ADV menu--	Bluetooth enable/disable

Note: The sequence in which functions appear may vary for different audio units and vehicles.
Note: Second level functions (advanced) can also be entered by selecting ADV menu from the first level menu.
*Automatic volume control.
** Alternative frequencies.

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB

Menu functions
	During CD playbackDuring radio recep
	12/24 hour12/24 hour
CLIP ON/OFF	CLIP ON/OFF
News ON/OFF	News ON/OFF
AVC^1	AVC^1
AF^2	AF^2

Audio unit operation

Menu functions
	During CD playbackDuring radio receptio
^3 volume	TA ^3 volumeTA
	Traffic local or distantTraffic local or dista
	ShuffleRegional ON/OFF
	Repeat-
	Comp ON/OFF-

Note: The sequence in which functions appear may vary for different audio units and vehicles.
^1 Automatic volume control.
^2 Alternative frequencies.
^3 Traffic announcement.

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB with Bluetooth

Pressing PHONE followed by the MENU button will access the following options:

- No active phone or Active phone

-Debond BT device

-Reject calls ON/OFF

- Bluetooth ON/OFF.

STATION PRESET BUTTONS

This feature allows you to store your favorite stations so that they can be recalled by selecting the appropriate waveband and pressing one of the preset buttons.

1. Select a waveband.

2. Tune to the station required.

3. Press and hold one of the preset buttons. The audio unit will mute. When sound returns the station has been stored.

This can be repeated on each waveband and for each preset button.

Note: When you drive to another part of the country, FM RDS (Radio Data System) stations that broadcast on alternative frequencies are stored on the preset buttons.

WAVEBAND BUTTON

Note: The selector can also be used to return to radio reception when you have been listening to another source.

Press the RADIO button to select from the wavebands available.

AUTOSTORE CONTROL

Note: This function will overwrite the previously stored autostore preset stations.

Note: This function can also be used to store stations manually in the same way as other wavebands.

Note: The strongest signals available on the selected waveband will be stored.

The sound is muted and AUTOSTORE will be shown in the display while the unit searches through the frequencies.

When the search is complete, sound is restored and the strongest signals are stored on the autostore presets.

6000CD

Press and hold the RADIO button.

Sony CD

Press and hold the AST or RADIO button.

TRAFFIC INFORMATION CONTROL

Many stations that broadcast on the FM waveband have a TP code to signify that they carry traffic program information.

Activating traffic announcements

Before you can receive traffic announcements, you must press the TA button. Either TA-D or TA-L will be shown in the display to indicate that the feature is switched on.

If you are already tuned to a station that broadcasts traffic information, TP will also be shown in the display. Otherwise the unit will search for a traffic program and display TP SEEK while doing so. If it cannot locate such a station, NOT FOUND will be shown in the display.

TP will be shown within a box in the display when you are tuned to a station providing traffic information from a linked RDS (radio data system) or EON (enhanced other network) station.

When traffic information is broadcast, it will automatically interrupt normal radio, tape or CD playback and TRAFFIC or NEWS will be shown in the display.

If the traffic signal weakens, TP will flash in the display. Press the seek up or seek down button (the left or right navigation button on Sony or Sony DAB audio units) to find another station.

Note: If this happens during CD or AUX playback or, on certain models, with the radio volume set to zero, the unit will retune automatically if the station is not available.

If a non-traffic station is selected or recalled using a preset button, the audio unit will remain on that station unless TA is turned off, then on again.

Note: If TA is on and you select a preset or manual tune to a non TA station no traffic announcement will be heard.

Local or distant traffic

The number of RDS or EON traffic announcements may become excessive in some areas so there is an option to select between local traffic information and all available information.

6000CD

1. Press and hold the MENU button until the display changes.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until TA is shown in the display.
3. Press the seek up or seek down button to select either local (TA LOCAL) or distant (TA DIST) traffic announcements.
4. Press the MENU button or allow the menu to time out to confirm your selection.

Note: Either TA-L or TA-D will be shown in the display.

Sony CD

1. Press the MENU button and use the up or down navigation button to select the TA display.
2. Press the left or right navigation button to select your required setting.
3. Press the MENU button to confirm your selection.

Traffic announcement volume

Traffic announcements interrupt normal broadcasts at a preset minimum level that is usually louder than normal listening volumes.

To adjust the preset volume

6000CD

1. Press and hold the TA button.
2. Rotate the volume control to make the necessary adjustment.

Note: The selected level will be shown in the display.

Sony CD

1. Press and hold the TA button.
2. Press the left or right navigation button to make the necessary adjustment.

Note: The selected level will be shown in the display.

Ending traffic announcements

The audio unit will return to normal operation at the end of each traffic announcement. To end the announcement prematurely, press TA during the announcement.

Note: If you press TA at any other time it will switch all announcements off.

STATION TUNING CONTROL

DAB service linking

Note: The DAB service linking is as per default off.

Note: Service linking allows cross-referencing to other corresponding frequencies of the same station, for example FM and other DAB ensembles.

Note: The system will automatically change to another corresponding station if the current one becomes unavailable, for example when leaving the coverage area.

Switching DAB service linking on and off

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the up or down navigation button scroll through the display until DIGITAL RADIO SERVICE LINK is shown in the display.
3. Using the left or right navigation button select AUTO or OFF.
4. Press the MENU button or the button between the navigation buttons to confirm your selection.

Seek tuning

6000CD

Select a waveband and briefly press the seek up or seek down button. The unit will stop at the first station it finds in the direction you have chosen.

Sony CD

Select a waveband and briefly press the up or down navigation button. The unit will stop at the first station it finds in the direction you have chosen.

Manual tuning

6000CD

1. Select a waveband and press the MENU button until MAN is shown in the display.
2. Press the seek up or seek down button to tune up or down the waveband in small increments or press and hold to increment quickly, until you find a station you want to listen to.

Sony CD

Select a waveband and briefly press the up or down navigation button to tune up or down the waveband in small increments. The display shows the frequency selected.

Sony DAB

Note: Ensembles are groups of stations.

Briefly press the up or down navigation button to move up or down the ensembles.

Scan tuning

The SCAN function allows you to listen to 10 seconds of each station detected.

6000CD

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until SCAN is shown in the display.
2. Press the seek up or seek down button to scan up or down the selected waveband.
3. Depending on the audio unit, press the seek up or seek down button or the MENU button to continue listening to a station.

Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press the SCAN button. SCAN flashes or SCANNING is shown in the display.
2. Press the left or right navigation button to scan within a waveband.
3. Press SCAN again to continue listening to a station.

AUTOMATIC VOLUME CONTROL

When available, automatic volume control (AVC) adjusts the volume level to compensate for engine noise and road speed noise.

All except Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until AVC is shown in the display.
2. Use the seek up or seek down button to adjust the AVC setting.
3. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection.

Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press the MENU button briefly.
2. Using the up or down navigation button select AVC.
3. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection.

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (DSP)

DSP occupancy

This feature takes into account the differences in distance from the various speakers in the vehicle to each seat. Select the sitting position for which the audio is to be correctly enhanced.

DSP equalizer

Select the music category that most suits your listening preference. The audio output will change to enhance the particular style of music chosen.

Changing the DSP settings

1. Press the DSP button once for occupancy and twice for equalizer. For item location: See Audio unit overview (page 253).
2. Use the up and down navigation buttons to select the required setting.
3. Press the button between the navigation buttons to confirm your selection.

AUDIO DISTORTION REDUCTION (CLIP)

When available CLIP automatically detects sound distortion and reduces the volume level until the distortion has been eliminated. This means that whilst the display might change numerically when you raise the volume manually with the control, there may be no actual increase in sound.

All except Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press and hold the MENU button until the display changes.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until CLIP is shown in the display.
3. Using the seek up or seek down button turn the function on or off.
4. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection.

Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press the MENU button briefly.
2. Using the up or down navigation button select CLIP.
3. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection.

ALTERNATIVE FREQUENCIES

Many programs broadcast on the FM waveband have a programme identification (PI) code, which can be recognized by audio units.

If your radio has alternative frequencies (AF) tuning switched on and you move from one transmission area to another, this function will search for and switch to a stronger station signal, if one can be found.

Under certain conditions, however, AF tuning may temporarily disrupt normal reception.

When selected, the unit continually evaluates signal strength and, if a better signal becomes available, the unit will switch to that alternative. It mutes while it checks a list of alternative frequencies and, if necessary, it will search once across the selected waveband for a genuine alternative frequency.

It will restore radio reception when it finds one or, if one is not found, the unit will return to the original stored frequency. On certain units, NOT FOUND will be shown in the display.

With AF-MAN selected, the unit operates in a similar way to AF-AUTO or AF-ON, but only searches for an alternative frequency when prompted by pressing a preset button.

With AF-OFF selected, the original stored frequency remains selected. In this mode, AF-OFF will be displayed every time the unit is turned on.

All except Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press and hold the MENU button until the display changes.

2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until AF is shown in the display.

3. Using the seek up or seek down button select the required setting.

4. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection.

Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press the MENU button briefly.
2. Using the left or right navigation button select the required setting.
3. Press the MENU button to confirm your selection.

REGIONAL MODE (REG)

Regional mode (REG) controls the behavior of AF switching between regionally related networks of a parent broadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairly large network across a large part of the country. At various times of the day this large network may be broken down into a number of smaller regional networks, typically centered on major towns or cities. When the network is not split into regional variants, the whole network caries the same programming.

Regional mode ON: This prevents 'random' AF switches when neighboring regional networks are not carrying the same programming.

Regional mode OFF: This allows a larger coverage area if neighboring regional networks are carrying the same programming, but can cause 'random' AF switches if they are not.

All except Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press and hold the MENU button until the display changes.

2. Press the MENU button repeatedly until REG is shown in the display.

3. Using the seek up or seek down button turn the function on or off.

4. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection.

Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press the MENU button briefly.
2. Using the up or down navigation button select REGIONAL.
3. Press the MENU button or allow the system to time out to confirm your selection.

NEWS BROADCASTS

Some audio units interrupt normal reception to broadcast news bulletins from stations on the FM waveband or radio data system (RDS) and enhanced other network (EON) linked stations, in the same way as traffic information is provided.

During news broadcasts, the display alternates between the station name and NEWS. News interrupts are broadcast at the same preset volume level as traffic announcements.

All except Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press and hold the MENU button until NEWS is shown in the display.
2. Using the seek up or seek down button turn the function on or off.
3. Press the MENU button to confirm your selection.

Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Using the up or down navigation button scroll through the display until NEWS is shown in the display.

3. Press the button between the navigation buttons to make your selection.

4. Using the left or right navigation button turn the function on or off.
5. Press the MENU button or the button between the navigation buttons to confirm your selection.

LOADING COMPACT DISCS

6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB

Always check that the CD aperture is empty before inserting a CD.

Insert a CD, label side up, into the audio unit.

LOADING, READING CD and AUDIO CD

or MP3 CD will be shown in the display, and playback will start automatically.

TRACK SELECTION

All except Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press the SEEK UP button once to move to the next track or press it repeatedly to access later tracks.
2. Press the SEEK DOWN button once to replay the current track. If pressed within two seconds of the start of a track, the previous track will be selected.
3. Press the SEEK DOWN button repeatedly to select previous tracks.

Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press the up navigation button once to move to the next track or press it repeatedly to access later tracks.
2. Press the down navigation button once to replay the current track. If pressed within two seconds of the start of a track, the previous track will be selected.
3. Press the down navigation button repeatedly to select previous tracks.

LOADING THE COMPACT DISC CHANGER

CAUTIONS

Do not insert more than one disc into each slot.
Keep the door closed when the magazine is installed.

Note: The unit will only accept conventional CDs.

For item location: See CD changer (page 223)..

Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with ports and a control panel (no text or symbols)

1. Open the door.
2. Press the button.
3. Remove the magazine.
4. Insert a disc, with the label facing upwards, into each slot. You will hear a distinct click to confirm correct loading.
5. Install the magazine in the direction indicated by the arrow on the magazine. You will hear a distinct click to confirm correct loading.
6. Close the door.

UNLOADING THE COMPACT DISC CHANGER

CAUTION

Keep the door closed when the magazine is installed.

1. Open the door.
2. Press the button.
3. Remove the magazine.
4. Pull the tray out using the lever on the side.
5. Remove the CD and close the tray.
6. Repeat steps four and five to remove remaining CDs.
7. Install the magazine in the direction indicated by the arrow on the magazine. You will hear a distinct click to confirm correct loading.
8. Close the door.

COMPACT DISC PLAYBACK

Note: During playback, the display indicates the disc, track and time that has elapsed since the start of the track.

Note: On CD changer audio units, if two or more CDs are loaded one after the other, playback will start with the last CD loaded.

During radio reception, press the CD/AUX button once to start CD playback.

Playback will start immediately after a disc is loaded.

Compact disc changer playback

Press the CD/AUX button twice to start CD playback.

Note: If the CD/AUX button is pressed when no discs are loaded, NO CDS will be shown in the display.

FAST FORWARD/REVERSE

All except Sony and Sony DAB

Press and hold the seek up or the seek down button to search forwards or backwards within the tracks on the disc.

Sony and Sony DAB

Press and hold the left or right navigation button to search forwards or backwards within the tracks on the disc.

SHUFFLE/RANDOM

Random track playback, also known as shuffle, plays all tracks on a CD in random order.

6000CD

Note: When SHUFF CD is selected only the tracks on the current CD will be shuffled. When SHUF ALL is selected the tracks on all the CDs will be shuffled.

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until SHUF is shown in the display.
2. Using the seek up or seek down button scroll through the display until SHUF ALL or SHUFF CD is shown in the display.
3. Using the seek up or seek down button select the next track to shuffle if required.

Note: With the function on, SHUFFLE will be shown in the display as each new track is selected.

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the up or down navigation button scroll through the display until SHUFFLE is shown in the display.
3. Use the left or right navigation button to switch the function on and off.

Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, options include SHUFF CD for the whole CD, or SHUF ALL to play all the tracks in the folder in a random order.

With this feature on, quieter music is boosted and louder music lowered to minimize repeated volume adjustments.

All except Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press MENU repeatedly until COMP is shown in the display.
2. Using the seek up or seek down button turn the function on or off.
3. Press the MENU button to confirm your selection.

Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Using the up or down navigation button scroll through the display until COMP is shown in the display.
3. Press the button between the navigation buttons to make your selection.
4. Using the left or right navigation button turn the function on or off.
5. Press the MENU button or the button between the navigation buttons to confirm your selection.

COMPACT DISC TRACK SCANNING

The SCAN function allows you to preview each track for approximately 10 seconds.

6000CD

Note: When selected, SCAN will be shown briefly in the display at the start of each track.

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until SCAN is shown in the display.
2. Using the seek up or seek down button select either SCAN CD or SCAN ALL.
3. Press the seek up or seek down button again to continue listening to a track.

Sony and Sony DAB

Note: Various scan modes are possible, according to the type of CD currently playing.

1. Press the SCAN button once to scan each track on an audio CD, or the first 10 seconds of each track on each folder of a MP3 CD.
2. Press the SCAN button again to select SCAN OFF (audio CD), or in the case of MP3 to scan each track within a folder.

EJECTING COMPACT DISCS

Note: Radio reception is restored automatically when the EJECT button is pressed.

Note: If the EJECT button is pressed in error, press the button again to cancel.

Note: If the CD is not removed it will be pulled back into the audio unit.

6000CD

Press the EJECT button at any time and remove the CD.

Sony CD

Note: If no CD is loaded when the EJECT button is pressed, NO CD will be shown in the display.

Press the EJECT button at any time and remove the CD. EJECTING and PLEASE REMOVE will be shown in the display.

REPEAT COMPACT DISC TRACKS

6000CD

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until REPEAT is shown in the display.
2. Using the SEEK UP or SEEK DOWN button choose between OFF and TRK.

Sony and Sony DAB

1. Press the MENU button.
2. using the up or down navigation buttons scroll through the display until REPEAT is shown in the display.
3. Using the left or right navigation buttons select REPEAT TRACK or REPEAT OFF.
4. Press the MENU button to confirm your selection.

Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, playback options are REPEAT TRACK, REP FOLDER and REPEAT OFF.

MP3 FILE PLAYBACK

Note: Some copy protected audio files may not be read by the CD player.

The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA format audio files.

When a CD containing audio is inserted into the CD player the disc's directory structure is read in. It may take a while before playback starts and is dependant on the quality of the disc.

MP3 tracks may be recorded on the CD in several ways. They can all be placed in the root directory like a conventional audio CD, or they can be placed in folders that may represent, for example, an album, an artist, or a genre.

6000CD

Press the FOLDER UP button to select the next music folder on the MP3 disc.

Press the FOLDER DOWN button to select the previous music folder on the MP3 disc.

Sony and Sony DAB

Use the up and down navigation buttons to select the next or previous music folder on the MP3 disc.

Playing a multi session disc

The normal playing sequence on CD's with multiple folders is to play the tracks in the first folder, then the tracks in any folders nested inside the first folder, then move onto the second folder, and so on. For example, if folder 1 has folders 1a and 1b within it, and folder 2 contains folder 2a, the playing sequence will be folder 1, 1a, 1b, 2, 2a.

When the playback of a file is finished the playback of the other files in the same directory continues. Directory change takes place automatically when all files in the current directory have been played back.

MP3 DISPLAY OPTIONS

When an MP3 disc is playing, certain information encoded in each track can be displayed. Such information will normally include:

• The file name
• The folder name
• ID3 information which might be the album or artist's name.

The unit will normally show the file name that is playing. To select one of the other items of information, press the INFO button repeatedly until the required item is shown in the display.

Note: If the ID3 information selected is unavailable, NO MP3 TAG will be shown in the display.

CD text display options

When an audio disc with CD text is playing, limited information encoded in each track can be displayed. Such information will normally include:

• The disc name
  • The artist name
• The track name.

Note: These display options are selected in the same way as MP3 displays. NO DISC NAME or NO TRACK NAME will be shown in the display if no information has been encoded.

ENDING COMPACT DISC PLAYBACK

Press the RADIO button.

Note: This will not eject the CD; the disc will merely pause at the point where radio reception was restored.

To resume CD playback, press the CD/AUX button again.

Note: For optimum performance when using any auxiliary device set the volume on the device high. This will reduce audio interference when charging the device via the vehicle power supply socket.

When fitted the Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket permits an auxiliary device, such as an MP3 player, to be linked into the vehicle audio system. Output can be played through the vehicle speakers.

To connect an auxiliary device, plug it into the AUX IN socket using a 3.5 mm conventional audio jack connector.

Select the auxiliary input via the CD/AUX button and playback will be heard through the vehicle speakers. AUX will be shown in the display. Volume, treble and bass can be adjusted on the audio unit as normal.

The audio unit buttons can also be used to restore playback from the audio unit, while the auxiliary device remains connected.

AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING

	RectificationAudio unit display
CD ERRORPLEASE CHECK CDCDC ERROR	General error message for CD fault conditions, for example cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted. May also indicate a audio unit malfunction. Make sure that the disc is correctly loaded, clean and reload the CD or replace the CD with a known music CD. SeeEjecting compact discs(page 269). SeeLoading compact discs(page 267). If error continues. See your dealer.
NO CDNO CDSNO CD #	Message to indicate that the audio unit or CD changer is empty. Insert a CD. SeeLoading compact discs(page 267).
HIGH TEMPCD DRIVE HIGH TEMP	Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work until it has cooled down.
SLOT FULL	Message to indicate that the CD slot is already loaded. Eject the CD from selected slot before attempting load operation or select another slot location. SeeLoading compact discs(page 267).
CDC FULL	Message to indicate that the audio unit is full. SeeEjecting compact discs(page 269).
DATA CD	An incompatible CD has been inserted, for example not an audio CD. SeeEjecting compact discs(page 269).
CODE ----	Message to prompt you for the keycode. SeeEntering a security code(page 256).
WAIT	Message to inform you to wait until the next keycode entry attempt can be made. SeeIncorrect security code(page 256).
TRIES	Message indicates the number of incorrect input attempts. SeeIncorrect security code(page 256).
LOCKED	Message to inform you that audio unit security system has locked the unit after repeated incorrect keycode entries. See your dealer.
KEYCODE....ENTER KEYCODE....	Message to prompt you for the keycode. SeeEntering a security code(page 256).
INCORRECT	Message to inform you that the entered keycode is incorrect. SeeIncorrect security code(page 256).

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTION

Using the system with the engine off will drain the battery.

This section describes the functions and features of the Bluetooth cell phone hands free system.

The Bluetooth cell phone part of the system provides interaction with the audio or navigation system and your cell phone. It allows you to use the audio or navigation system to make and receive calls without having to hold your cell phone.

Compatibility of phones

CAUTION

As no common agreement exists, cell phone manufacturers are able to implement a variety of profiles in their

Bluetooth devices. Because of this, an incompatibility can occur between the phone and hands-free system, which in some cases may significantly degrade the system performance. To avoid this situation, only recommended phones should be used.

Please visit the website www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for full details.

TELEPHONE SETUP

Phonebook

After start up access to the phonebook list can be delayed for several minutes, depending upon the size.

Phonebook categories

Depending on your phonebook entry, different categories can be displayed in the audio unit.

For example:

	MobileM
	OfficeO
	HomeH
F	Fax

Note: Entries may be displayed without a category attachment.

The category can also be indicated as an icon:

Phone

Mobile

Home

Office

Fax

Making a phone an active phone

When using the system for the first time, no phone is connected to the system.

Bluetooth phone

After bonding a Bluetooth phone to the system, this becomes the active phone. For further information refer to the phone menu.

Select the phone from the active phone menu.

Turning the ignition and radio or navigation unit back on again, the last active phone is picked up by the system.

Note: In some cases the Bluetooth connection must also be confirmed on the phone.

Bond another Bluetooth phone

Bond a new Bluetooth phone as described in the requirements for a Bluetooth connection.

Phones stored in the system are accessible by using the phone list on the audio unit.

Note: A maximum of six devices may be bonded. If six Bluetooth devices have already been bonded, one of these has to be debonded in order to bond a new device.

BLUETOOTH SETUP

Before you can use your telephone with your vehicle it must be bonded to the vehicle telephone system.

Handling of phones

Up to six Bluetooth devices can be bonded to the vehicle system.

Note: If there is an ongoing call when the phone in use is selected as the new active phone, the call is transferred to the vehicle audio system.

Note: Even if connected to the car system, your phone can still be used in the usual way.

Requirements for Bluetooth connection

The following are required before a Bluetooth phone connection can be made.

1. The Bluetooth feature must be activated on the phone and on the audio unit. Make sure the Bluetooth menu option in the audio unit is set to ON. For information on phone settings, refer to your phone user guide.
2. In the Bluetooth menu on your phone, search for Ford Audio and select it.
3. Enter the code number shown on the vehicle display using the phone keypad. If no code number is shown on the display, enter the Bluetooth PIN number 0000 using the phone keypad. Now enter the Bluetooth PIN number shown on the vehicle display.
4. If your cell phone asks you to authorize the automatic connection, select YES.

Note: A phone call will be disconnected if the audio unit is switched off. If the ignition key is turned to the off position the phone call will remain in progress.

TELEPHONE CONTROLS

Remote control

Voice, accept and reject button

1 E87662 2

Voice button1

Accept and reject button2

The VOICE button is used to activate or switch off the voice control.

On vehicles with an accept and reject button, phone calls can be accepted and rejected by pressing the appropriate button.

Note: Some audio units have the accept and reject buttons on the front bezel. These operate in the same way.

USING THE TELEPHONE - VEHICLES WITHOUT: NAVIGATION SYSTEM

This chapter describes the phone functions of the audio unit.

Note: Refer to your audio guide for details of the controls.

An active phone must be present.

Even if connected to the audio unit, your phone can still be used in the usual way.

Note: You can exit the phone menu by pressing any source button CD, AM/FM or AUX.

Making a call

Dialing a number using voice control

Phone numbers can be dialed using voice control. See Telephone commands (page 291).

Dialing a number using the address book

You can access your phone address book via Bluetooth. The entries will appear in the unit display.

1. Press the PHONE or the call accept button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Keep pressing the MENU button until PHONEBOOK appears.

4. Press the seek buttons to select the desired phone number.

Note: Press and hold the seek button to skip to the next letter in the alphabet.

1. Press the PHONE or the call accept button to dial the selected phone number.

Dialing a number using the address book - Sony radio

You can access your phone address book via Bluetooth. The entries will appear in the unit display.

1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the seek button until the phone book is shown.
3. Press the up/down arrow buttons to select the desired phone number.

Note: Press and hold the up/down arrow buttons to skip to the next letter in the alphabet.

1. Press the PHONE or the call accept button to dial the selected phone number.

Dialing a number using the telephone keypad

If you have an audio unit with a telephone keypad (buttons 0-9, * and #):

1. Press the call accept button. Press the PHONE button if you have a Sony radio.
2. Dial the number using the telephone keypad on the audio unit.
3. Press the call accept button.

Note: If you enter an incorrect digit whilst entering a phone number, press the seek left button to erase the last digit. A long press will erase the complete string of digits.

Press and hold 0 to enter a + digit.

Ending a call

Calls can be ended by pressing the call reject button.

Audio units without a telephone keypad can also end a call by pressing either PHONE, CD, AM/FM or ON/OFF, or by pressing the MODE button on the remote control

Redialing a number

1. Press the PHONE or the call accept button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Select the CALL OUT list or the CALL IN list. On some audio units, select the MISSED, INCOMING or OUTGOING calls list.
   Note: If the active phone does not provide a call out list, the last outgoing call number/entry can be redialed.
4. Press the seek button on the audio unit.
5. Press the PHONE or the call accept button to dial the desired phone number.

Redialing a number - Sony radio

1. Press the PHONE or the call accept button.
2. Press the seek button until the desired list is displayed.

Note: If the active phone does not provide a call out list, the last outgoing call number/entry can be redialed.

1. Press the up/down buttons to select the desired phone number.

2. Press the PHONE or the call accept button to dial the phone number.

Redialing the last dialed number - Sony radio

1. Press the call accept button.
2. Press the call accept button a second time to dial the number.

Receiving an incoming call

Accepting an incoming call

Incoming calls can be accepted by pressing either the call accept button, the PHONE button or the MODE button on the remote control.

Rejecting an incoming call

Incoming calls can be rejected by pressing the call reject button.

Audio units without a telephone keypad can also reject a call by pressing either PHONE, CD, AM/FM or ON/OFF.

Receiving a second incoming call

Note: The second incoming call function must be activated in your phone.

If there is an incoming call whilst there is an ongoing call, a beep will be heard and you will have the option to end the active call and to accept the incoming call.

Accepting a second incoming call

Second incoming calls can be accepted by pressing either the call accept button, the PHONE button, or the MODE button on the remote control.

Rejecting a second incoming call

Second incoming calls can be rejected by pressing the call reject button. Units without a telephone keypad can also reject a second incoming call by pressing the CD button, or the AM/FM button.

Muting the microphone

During a call, it is possible to mute the microphone. Whilst muted, confirmation will appear in the display.

Audio units with green call accept button

Press the call accept button. Press the button once again to turn this function off.

Audio units without green call accept button

Press the seek up or down button. Press the button once again to turn this function off.

Changing the active phone

Note: Phones must be bonded to the system before they can be made active.

Using the station storage button

Note: This process is only for audio units without a telephone keypad.

1. Press the PHONE button on the audio unit.
2. Press the preset number required (using the station preset buttons 1 - 6).

Using the audio unit menu

Note: After bonding a phone to the system, this becomes the active phone.

1. Press the PHONE or call accept button.
2. Press the MENU button on the audio unit.
3. Select the ACTIVE PHONE option on the audio unit.
4. Scroll through the different stored phones by using the seek buttons to display the bonded phones.
5. Press the MENU button to select the phone which is to be the active phone.

Debonding a bonded phone

A bonded phone can be deleted from the system at any time, unless a phone call is in progress.

1. Press the PHONE or call accept button.
2. Press the MENU button on the audio unit.
3. Select the DEBOND option on the audio unit.
4. Scroll through the different phones by using the seek buttons and display the phone to be debonded.
5. Press the MENU button to select the phone which is to be debonded.

Debonding a bonded phone - Sony radio

A bonded phone can be deleted from the system at any time, unless a phone call is in progress.

1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the up/down arrow buttons until you reach the DEBOND option.
3. Scroll through the different phones by using the seek buttons and display the phone to be debonded.
4. Press the OK button to be debond.

USING THE TELEPHONE - VEHICLES WITH: NAVIGATION SYSTEM

This chapter describes the phone functions of the Navigation System.

Note: Refer to your Navigation System guide for details of the controls.

An active phone must be present.

Even if connected to the navigation system, your phone can still be used in the usual way.

Making a call

Dialing a number

Phone numbers can be dialed using voice control. See Voice control (page 281).

Ending a call

Calls can be ended by pressing either the END button, the MODE button on the remote switch or the ON/OFF button on the navigation system.

Redialing a number

1. Press the PHONE button on the unit.
2. Select REDIAL.

Receiving an incoming call

Accepting an incoming call

Incoming calls can be accepted by pressing either the call accept button, the MODE button on the remote control, the PHONE button on the unit or by using the ACCEPT option in the menu.

Rejecting an incoming call

Incoming calls can be rejected by pressing either the call reject button, the CD or AM/FM buttons on the unit, or by using the REJECT option in the menu.

Receiving a second incoming call

Note: The second incoming call function must be activated in your phone.

If there is an incoming call, whilst there is an ongoing call, a beep will be heard and you will have the option to end the active call and to accept the incoming call.

Accepting a second incoming call

Second incoming calls can be accepted by pressing either the call accept button, the MODE button on the remote control, the PHONE button on the unit or by using the ACCEPT option in the menu.

Note: This will cancel the ongoing call.

Rejecting a second incoming call

Second incoming calls can be rejected by pressing either the call reject button, or one of the following buttons on the unit: CD, AM/FM.

Muting the microphone

During a call, it is possible to mute the microphone. Whilst muted, confirmation will appear in the display.

SD navigation units

Press the mute button (symbol of a microphone with a line through it). Press the button once again to turn this function off.

CD navigation units

Press the microphone mute button. Press the button once again to turn this function off.

Changing the active phone

Note: Phones must be bonded to the system before they can be made active.

Note: After bonding a phone to the system, this becomes the active phone.

1. Press the PHONE button on the unit.
2. Using the BT SETTINGS option in the menu, select the active phone from the list.

Debonding a bonded phone

A bonded phone can be deleted from the system at any time, unless a phone call is in progress.

1. Press the PHONE button on the unit.
2. Select the BT SETTINGS option in the menu.
3. Select the DEBOND option in the menu.
4. Select the phone from the list.

Using the system with the engine off will drain the battery.

Voice recognition enables operation of the system without the need to divert your attention from the road ahead in order to change settings, or receive feedback from the system.

Whenever you issue one of the defined commands with the system active, the voice recognition system converts your command into a control signal for the system. Your inputs take the form of dialogues or commands. You are guided through these dialogues by announcements or questions.

Please familiarize yourself with the functions of the system before using voice recognition.

Supported commands

The voice control system allows you to control the following vehicle functions:

• Bluetooth phone
  ·radio
• CD Player/CD Changer
• external device (USB)
• external device (iPod)
• automatic climate control
• navigation system - refer to separate navigation handbook.

System response

As you work through a voice session the system will prompt you with a beep tone each time the system is ready to proceed. Do not try to give any commands until the beep tone has been heard. The voice control system will repeat each spoken command back to you.

If you are not sure how to continue say "HELP" for assistance or "CANCEL" if you do not wish to continue.

The "HELP" function provides only a subset of the available voice commands. Detailed explanations of all possible voice commands can be found on the following pages.

Voice commands

All voice commands should be given using a natural speaking voice, as if speaking to a passenger or on the phone. Your voice level should be dependant on the surrounding noise level inside or outside the vehicle but do not shout.

USING VOICE CONTROL

System operation

The order and content of the voice controls are given in the following lists. The tables show the sequence of user voice commands and system responses for each available function.

<> indicates a number or stored name tag to be inserted by the user.

Short cuts

There are a number of voice command short cuts available, which allow you to control some vehicle features without having to follow the complete command menu. These are:

• Phone: CALL or DIAL NAME, DIAL NUMBER, and REDIAL.

• Phone: CALL FIRST NAME, LAST NAME at LOCATION. Example: Call Fred Bloggs at home.

• CD player or CD changer: DISC and TRACK.
  •Automatic climate control: TEMPERATURE, AUTO MODE, DEFROSTING ON, DEMISTING ON, DEFROSTING OFF and DEMISTING OFF.
  •Radio: TUNE NAME.

• External device (USB, iPod and SD card): TRACK.

Start communicating with the system

Before you can start talking to the system you first have to press the VOICE or MODE button for each operation and wait until the system answers with a beep. See (page 281).

Press the button again to cancel the voice session.

Name tag

The name tag functionality can support the phone, audio and navigation features by using the "STORE NAME" function. You can assign name tags to items such as favorite radio stations and personal phone contacts. See Audio unit commands (page 282). See Telephone commands (page 291). See Navigation system commands (page 296).

• Store up to 20 name tags per function.
  •The average recording time for each name tag is approximately 2-3 seconds.

AUDIO UNIT COMMANDS

CD Player

You can control playback directly by voice control.

Overview

The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu in selected examples.

"CD PLAYER"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT FOLDER"**

Voice control

"CD PLAYER"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.

Track

You can choose a track on your CD directly.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1
2	"TRACK"	"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE"
3	"<a number between 1 and 99>"**	"TRACK"

* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4", "5" for track 245)

Shuffle all

To set random playback.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1
	"SHUFFLE ALL"2

CD Changer

Overview

The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu in selected examples.

Voice control

"CD CHANGER"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"DISC"*

"TRACK"*

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE CD"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"***

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT CD"

"REPEAT FOLDER"***

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.

Disc

If you have a CD changer you can choose the disc number.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"CD CHANGER""CD CHANGER"1
2	"DISC"*	"DISC NUMBER PLEASE"
		"DISC<number>"""a number betw

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Track

You can choose a track on your CD directly.

Voice control

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"CD CHANGER""CD CHANGER"
2	"TRACK"*	"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE"
3	"<a number between 1 and 99>"**	"TRACK

* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4", "5" for track 245)

Shuffle CD

To set random playback within the CD contents.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"CD CHANGER""CD CHANGER"
	"SHUFFLE CD"2

Radio

The radio voice commands support the functionality of the radio and allow you to tune radio stations by voice control.

Overview

The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu.

"RADIO"

"HELP"

"AM"

"FM"

"TUNE NAME"*

"DELETE NAME"

"DELETE DIRECTORY"

"PLAY DIRECTORY"

"STORE NAME"

"PLAY"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Tune frequency

This function allows you to tune your radio by voice commands.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"RADIO""RADIO"1
		"AM FREQUENCY PLEASE""AM"2
		"FM FREQUENCY PLEASE""FM"
3	"*	"TUNE"

* The frequency may be entered in a variety of ways. Refer below for representative examples.

FM band: 87.5 - 108.0 in increments of 0.1

- "Eighty nine point nine" (89.9)

- "Ninety" (90.0)

- "One hundred point five" (100.5)

- "One zero one point one" (101.1)

- "One zero eight" (108.0)

AM/MW band: 531 - 1602 in increments of 9

AM/LW band: 153 - 281 in increments of 1

- "Five thirty one" (531)

- "Nine hundred" (900)

- "Fourteen forty" (1440)

- "Fifteen zero three" (1503)

- "Ten eighty" (1080)

Store name

If you have tuned a radio station, you can store it with a name in the directory.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"RADIO""RADIO"1
		"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"
		"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""3"
		"STORING NAME""4"

Voice control

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"STORED"

Tune name

This function allows you to call up a stored radio station.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"RADIO""RADIO"1
2	"TUNE NAME"*	"NAME PLEASE"
		"TUNE"3

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Delete name

This function allows you to delete a stored radio station.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"RADIO""RADIO"1
		"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME
		"DELETE<name>"""3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
		"DELETED""YES"4
		"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Play directory

This function allows you to let the system tell you all of the stored radio stations.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"RADIO""RADIO"1
		"PLAY" "PLAY DIRE"

Delete directory This function allows you to delete all stored radio stations at once.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"RADIO""RADIO"1
		"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECT"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
		"RADIO DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3
		"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Play

This function switches the audio source to the radio mode.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"RADIO""RADIO"1
	"PLAY"2

Auxiliary input

This function allows you to switch the audio source to the attached auxiliary input device.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DE\
2	"LINE IN"	"LINE IN"

External devices - USB

These voice commands support the functionality of an external USB device which may be connected to the audio unit.

Overview

The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu in selected examples.

Voice control

"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "USB"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"PLAYLIST"*

"FOLDER"*

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"

"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT FOLDER"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Playlists and folders activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See General Information (page 299).

USB play

This function allows you to switch the audio source to the attached USB device.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL I
		"USB""USB"2
	"PLAY"3

USB Track

You can choose a track on your USB device directly.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DE\
		"USB""USB"2
		"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"3
4	"*	"TRACK"

* Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4", "5" for track 245)

External devices - iPod

These voice commands support the functionality of an iPod which may be connected to the audio unit.

Overview

The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu in selected examples.

"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "IPOD"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"PLAYLIST"**

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See General Information (page 299).

iPod Track

You can choose a track off the all titles list of your iPod directly.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL I
		"IPOD""IPOD"2
3	"TRACK"*	"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE"
4	"<a number between 1 and 99>"**	"TRACK

* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to five single digits (for example "5", "2", "4", "5", "3" for track 52453), to a limit of 65535.

iPod playlist

You can choose a playlist from your iPod directly.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL I
		"IPOD""IPOD"2
3	"PLAYLIST"*	"PLAYLIST NUMBER PLEASE"
		"PLAYLIST"""

* Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See General Information (page 299).

TELEPHONE COMMANDS

Phone

Your phone system allows you to create an additional phonebook. The stored entries can be dialed by voice control. Phone numbers stored by using voice control are stored on the vehicle system and not in your phone.

Overview

The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu in selected examples.

"PHONE"

"HELP"

"MOBILE NAME"*

"DIAL NUMBER"*

"DIAL NAME"*

"DELETE NAME"

"DELETE DIRECTORY"

"PLAY DIRECTORY"

"STORE NAME"

"REDIAL"*

"ACCEPT CALLS"

"REJECT CALLS"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Phone functions

Dial number

Phone numbers can be dialed after giving the name tag voice command.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"PHONE""PHONE"1
2	"DIAL NUMBER"*	"NUMBER PLEASE"
		"<phone number>"<phone number: CONTINUE?"
		"DIALLING""DIAL"4
		"<repeat last part of number>"CORRECTI CONTINUE?"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Voice control

Dial name Phone numbers can be dialed after giving

the name tag voice command.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"PHONE""PHONE"1
2	"DIAL NAME"*	"NAME PLEASE"
		"DIAL<name>"""<name>'3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
		"DIALLING""YES"4
		"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Redial

This function allows you to redial the last dialed phone number.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"PHONE""PHONE"1
2	"REDIAL"*	"REDIAL" "CONFIRM YES OR NO"
		"DIALLING""YES"3
		"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Mobile name

This function allows you to access phone numbers stored with a name tag in your mobile phone.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"PHONE""PHONE"1
2	"MOBILE NAME"*	"MOBILE NAME""

* Can be used as a shortcut.

DTMF (Tone dialling)

This function transfers spoken numbers into DTMF tones. For example, to make a remote enquiry to your home answering machine or to enter a PIN number etc.

Note: DTMF can only be used during an ongoing call. Operate the VOICE button and wait for the system prompt.

Can only be used with vehicles installed with a dedicated VOICE button.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"NUMBER PLEASE"1
	""2

Create a phonebook

Store name

New entries can be stored with the "STORE NAME" command. This feature can be used to dial a number by calling up the name instead of the full phone number.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"PHONE""PHONE"1
		"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"
		"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""3
		"STORING NAME""4"STORED"NUMBER PLEASE"
		""
		"STORING NUMBER""STORE"6""NUMBER STORED"

Delete name

Stored names can also be deleted from the directory.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"PHONE""PHONE"1
		"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME
		"DELETE<name>"""3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
		""DELETED""YES"4
		"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Play directory

Use this function to let the system tell you all stored entries.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"PHONE""PHONE"1
		"PLAY DIRECTORY""PLAY DIREC"

Delete directory

This function allows you to delete all entries in one go.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"PHONE""PHONE"1
		"DELETE2DIRECTORY""DELETE DIF"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
	"YES"3	"DIRECTORY DELETED"
		"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Main settings

Reject calls

Calls can be set to be automatically rejected using voice control.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"PHONE""PHONE"1
		"REJECT CALLS""REJECT CALLS"2
	"ACCEPT CALLS"	"ACCEPT CALLS"

* use this command to turn the reject mode off

NAVIGATION SYSTEM COMMANDS

Please refer to your separate Navigation manual for details of the command menus.

Overview

The overview below shows the available voice commands. The following lists will give further information about the complete command menu in selected examples.

CLIMATE CONTROL COMMANDS

Climate

The climate voice commands supports the functionality of the fan speed, temperature and mode settings. Not all functions are available on all vehicles.

"CLIMATE"

"HELP"

"FAN"*

"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON"*

"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"*

"TEMPERATURE"*

"AUTO MODE"*

* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the "FAN" shortcut is not available.

Voice control

Fan This function allows you to adjust the fan

speed.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1
2	""FAN"*	"FAN SPEED PLEASE"
3		"FAN MINIMUM""MINIMUM"
		"FAN<number>""a number be
		"FAN MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"

* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the "FAN" shortcut is not available.

Defrosting/Demisting

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1
2	"DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING ON"*	"DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING ON"
	"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING OFF"*	"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Temperature

This function allows you to adjust the temperature.

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1
2	"TEMPERATURE"	"TEMPERATURE PLEASE"
		"TEMPERATURE MINIMUM""MINIMUM"

Voice control

		System answerUser saysSteps
	"<a number between 15 and 29 °C with 0.5 increments>" or "<a number between 59 and 84 °F>"	"TEMPERATURE"
		"TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"

* Can be used as a shortcut.

Auto mode

		System answerUser saysSteps
		"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1
2	"AUTO MODE"*	"AUTO MODE"

* Can be used as a shortcut. Can be deactivated by selecting a different temperature or fan speed.

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONS

Take care when handling external devices with exposed electrical connectors (such as the USB plug).

Always replace the protective cap/shield when possible. There may be a risk of electrostatic discharge causing damage to the device.

Do not touch or handle the USB socket in the vehicle. Cover the socket when not in use.

Only use USB Mass-Storage device compliant devices.

Always switch your audio unit to a different source (for example the radio) before unplugging the USB ce.

Do not install or connect USB hubs or splitters.

Note: The system is only designed to recognize and read suitable audio files from a USB device that conforms to the USB Mass-Storage device class or an iPod. Not all available USB devices can be guaranteed to function with the system.

Note: It is possible to connect compatible devices with a trailing USB lead as well as those that plug into the vehicle USB socket directly (for example USB memory sticks and pen drives).

Note: Some USB devices with a higher power consumption may not be compatible (for example some larger hard drives).

Note: Access time to read the files on the external device will vary depending upon factors such as the file structure, size and device content.

The system supports a range of external devices, to fully integrate with your audio unit via the USB and auxiliary input sockets. Once connected, control of the external device is possible via the audio unit.

A list of typical compatible devices are shown below:

• USB memory sticks
• USB portable hard drives
  • Some MP3 players with USB connection
• iPod media players (refer to www.ford-mobile -connectivity.com for latest compatibility list).

The system is USB 2.0 full speed compatible, USB 1.1 host compliant and supports FAT 16/32 file systems.

Information on audio file structures for external devices

USB

Create only a single partition on the USB device.

We recommend that you put MP3 files in a folder.

If playlists are created, they must contain correct file paths referenced to the USB device. It is recommended to create the playlist after the audio files have been transferred to the USB device.

Playlists must be created in .m3u format.

Audio files must be in .mp3 format.

Do not exceed the following limits:

• 1000 items per folder (files, folders and playlists)
• 5000 folders per USB device (including playlists)
• 8 subfolder levels.

To enable voice control for custom playlists and folders, follow the procedure below:

• Create folders named with the structure "Ford<*>" where <*> is a number 1-10. For example "Ford3" without an extension.
• Create playlists named with the structure "Ford<*>.m3u" where <*> is a number 1-10. For example "Ford5.m3u" without any space between "Ford" and the number.

Thereafter, custom folders and playlists will be selectable with voice control. See Audio unit commands (page 282).

iPod

To enable voice control for custom playlists, create playlists named with the structure "Ford<*>" where <*> is a number 1-10. For example "Ford7" without any space between "Ford" and the number.

Thereafter, playlists will be selectable with voice control. See Audio unit commands (page 282).

CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE

WARNING

Make sure the external device is securely mounted within the vehicle, and that trailing connections do not act any of the driving controls.

External devices may be connected using the auxiliary input socket and the USB port. See Audio Input Jack (page 223). See USB Port (page 223).

Connection

Plug in the device, and if necessary secure it to prevent movement within the vehicle.

Connecting an iPod

For optimum convenience and audio quality, we recommend that you purchase a dedicated single connection lead available from your dealer.

Alternatively, it is possible to connect your iPod using the standard iPod USB cable and a separate 3.5mm audio jack lead. If using this method preset the iPod volume to maximum and turn off any equalizer settings before making the connections:

• Connect the headphone output of the iPod to the AUX IN socket.
• Connect the USB cable from the iPod to the vehicle USB socket.

CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE - VEHICLES WITH: BLUETOOTH

Connecting a Bluetooth audio device

CAUTION

As various standards exist, manufacturers are able to implement a variety of profiles in their Bluetooth devices. Because of this, an incompatibility can occur between the Bluetooth device and the system, which in some cases may limit system functionality. To avoid this situation, only recommended devices should be used.

Please visit the website www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for full details.

Bonding the device

Note: Some audio and navigation units have a separate Bluetooth audio menu. Use this to access setup and control.

To connect the device to the system follow the same procedure as for Bluetooth hands free phones. See Bluetooth setup (page 275).

Operating the device

Select Bluetooth audio as the active source.

Tracks can be accessed by skipping forwards and backwards using the steering wheel controls, or directly from the audio unit controls.

USING A USB DEVICE

Various icons are used to identify types of audio file, folders etc.

USB device is the active source

Folder

Playlist

Album

Artist

Filename

Track title

Information not available

Sony radio

Operation

Select the USB device as the audio source by repeatedly pressing the CD/AUX button until USB appears in the display. After first connecting the USB device, the first track within the first folder will start to play automatically. Subsequently, following audio source switching, the position of playback on the USB device is remembered.

To browse the device contents, press the up/down arrow key or the OK button once.

The display will show the track information, together with other important information described below:

• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of the display shows the current position of the folder view.
  -">"after an entry indicates a further level down is readable (for example a folder named after an album, with individual album tracks within that folder).
• "<" before the list indicates that a further level up is readable.
• Icons to the left of track/folder text indicate the type of file/folder. Refer to the list for an explanation of these icons.

To navigate the USB device contents, use the up/down arrow keys to scroll through lists, and the left/right keys to move up or down within the folder hierarchy. Once your desired track, playlist or folder is highlighted, press the OK button to select playback.

Note: If you wish to jump to the top level of the USB device contents, press and hold the left arrow key.

Audio control

Press the left and right arrow keys to skip backwards and forwards through tracks.

Press and hold the left/right arrow keys to enable fast rewind/fast forward through track content.

Press the up/down arrow key or the OK button to browse the device contents.

Press the MENU key to enter the USB menu. It is possible to enable shuffle and repeat functions here with respect to folders and playlists.

Press the SCAN button to scan the whole device, current folder or a playlist if it is in operation.

Press the INFO button to display the following:

- filename

• title

- artist

-album

- track number and playing time.

Repeated button presses will scroll through these displays.

CD Navigation units

Operation

Select the USB device as the audio source by pressing the CD/AUX button until DEVICES appears in the display. Select DEVICES and then select USB from the available device list. After first connecting the USB device, the first track within the first folder will start to play automatically. Subsequently, following audio source switching, the position of playback on the USB device is remembered.

To browse the device contents, press the SELECT button once.

The display will show the track information, together with other important information described below:

- A vertical scroll bar on the right side of the display shows the current position of the folder view.

-">"after an entry indicates a further level down is readable (for example a folder named after an album, with individual album tracks within that folder).

- "<" to the left hand side of the display indicates that a further level up is readable.

- Icons to the left of track/folder text indicate the type of file/folder. Refer to the list for an explanation of these icons.

To navigate the USB device contents, use the rotary scroll/select button to browse through lists. Push the button to expand the contents within the highlighted playlist or folder, or to commence playback of a particular track. Press ESC to go up one level.

Audio control

Press the SEEK up and down keys to skip backwards and forwards through tracks.

Press and hold the SEEK keys to enable fast rewind/fast forward through track content.

Rotate or press the SELECT button to browse the device contents.

Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons to enable shuffle and repeat functions with respect to folders and playlists. Different options may appear depending upon whether or not a playlist is in operation.

Press the SCAN button to scan the current playlist if it is in operation, or the complete USB device or folder.

Press the INFO button to display the following:

• filename
  •title
• artist
  -album
• track number and playing time.

SD Navigation units

Operation

Select the USB device as the audio source by pressing the CD/AUX button until the USB button appears to the left of the display. Select USB from the available device list.

Note: Some devices may be shown but not selectable, depending if the device is connected or not.

After first connecting the USB device, the first track within the first folder will start to play automatically. Subsequently, following audio source switching, the position of playback on the USB device is remembered.

To browse the device contents, press the scroll up or down arrow button.

The display will show the track information, together with other important information described below:

• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of the display shows the current position of the folder view.
  -">"after an entry indicates a further level down is readable (for example a folder named after an album, with individual album tracks within that folder).

• "<" to the left hand side of the display indicates that a further level up is readable.

• Icons to the left of track/folder text indicate the type of file/folder. Refer to the list for an explanation of these icons.

To navigate the USB device contents, use the scroll buttons to browse through lists. Push the button to expand the contents within the highlighted playlist or folder, or to commence playback of a particular track. Press the left arrow key to go up one level.

Audio control

Press the SEEK up and down keys to skip backwards and forwards through tracks.

Press and hold the SEEK keys to enable fast rewind/fast forward through track content.

Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browse the device contents.

Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons to enable shuffle and repeat functions with respect to folders and playlists.

Press the SCAN button to scan the current playlist if it is in operation, or the complete USB device or folder.

Press the INFO button to display the following:

• filename
  •title
  ·artist
  -album
• track number and playing time.

USING AN IPOD

Various icons are used to identify types of audio file, folders etc.

Vertical sequence of black-and-white icons representing media, file, image, and document symbols (no text or labels)

iPod is the active source

iPod playlist

iPod artist

iPod album

iPod genre

iPod song

iPod generic category

iPod generic media file

Sony radio

Operation

Connect the iPod. See Connecting an external device (page 300).

Select the iPod as the audio source by repeatedly pressing the CD/AUX button until iPod appears in the display.

The iPod menu list for browsing contents will be available through the radio display. Navigation of the contents follows the same principles as for iPod standalone use (for example search by artist, title, etc.). To browse the iPod contents, press the up/down arrow key or the OK button once.

The display will show the track information, together with other important information described below:

• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of the display shows the current position of the list view.
  -">"after an entry indicates a further level down is readable (for example all albums by a particular artist).
• "<" before the list indicates that a further level up is readable.
  •An icon on the left side indicates the type of the currently displayed list (for example list of albums). Refer to the list for an explanation of these icons.

To navigate the iPod contents, use the up/down arrow keys to scroll through lists, and the left/right keys to move up or down within the hierarchy. Once your desired track, playlist, album, artist or genre is highlighted, press the OK button to select playback.

Note: If you wish to jump to the top level of the iPod contents, press and hold the left arrow key.

Audio control

Press the left and right arrow keys to skip backwards and forwards through tracks.

Press and hold the left/right arrow keys to enable fast rewind/fast forward through track content.

Press the up/down arrow key or the OK button to browse the iPod contents.

Press the MENU key to enter the iPod menu. It is possible to enable shuffle and repeat functions here. It is also possible to enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" option directly from the top level.

Press the SCAN button to scan the currently selected tracks.

Press the INFO button to display the following:

•title
- artist
- track number and playing time.

Repeated button presses will scroll through these displays.

CD Navigation units

Operation

Connect the iPod. See Connecting an external device (page 300).

Select the iPod as the audio source by pressing the CD/AUX button until DEVICES appears in the display. Select DEVICES and then select iPod from the available device list.

The iPod menu list for browsing contents will be available through the display. Navigation of the contents follows the same principles as for iPod standalone use (for example search by artist, title, etc.). To browse the iPod contents, press the SELECT button once.

The display will show the track information, together with other important information described below:

• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of the display shows the current position of the list view.
  -">"after an entry indicates a further level down is readable (for example all albums by a particular artist).
• "<" before the list indicates that a further level up is readable.
• An icon on the left side indicates the type of the currently displayed list (for example list of albums). Refer to the list for an explanation of these icons.

To navigate the iPod contents, use the rotary scroll/select button to browse through lists. Push the button to expand the contents within the highlighted playlist, album, artist, genre or to commence playback of a particular track. Press ESC to go up one level.

Audio control

Press the SEEK up and down keys to skip backwards and forwards through tracks.

Press and hold the SEEK keys to enable fast rewind/fast forward through track content.

Rotate or press the SELECT button to browse the iPod contents.

Press the MENU key to enter the iPod menu. It is possible to enable shuffle and repeat functions here. It is also possible to enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" option directly from the top level.

Press the SCAN button to scan the currently selected tracks.

Press the INFO button to display the following:

• title
- artist
- track number and playing time.

SD Navigation units

Operation

Connect the iPod. See Connecting an external device (page 300).

Select the iPod as the audio source by pressing the CD/AUX button until the iPod button appears to the left of the display. Select iPod from the available device list.

Note: Some devices may be shown but not selectable, depending if the device is connected or not.

The iPod menu list for browsing contents will be available through the display. Navigation of the contents follows the same principles as for iPod standalone use (for example search by artist, title, etc.). To browse the iPod contents, press the scroll up or down arrow button.

The display will show the track information, together with other important information described below:

• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of the display shows the current position of the list view.
  -">"after an entry indicates a further level down is readable (for example all albums by a particular artist).
• "<" before the list indicates that a further level up is readable.
• An icon on the left side indicates the type of the currently displayed list (for example list of albums). Refer to the list for an explanation of these icons.

To navigate the iPod contents, use the scroll buttons to browse through lists. Push the button to expand the contents within the highlighted playlist, album, artist, genre or to commence playback of a particular track. Press the left arrow key to go up one level.

Audio control

Press the SEEK up and down keys to skip backwards and forwards through tracks.

Press and hold the SEEK keys to enable fast rewind/fast forward through track content.

Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browse the iPod contents.

Press the MENU key to enter the iPod menu. It is possible to enable shuffle and repeat functions here. It is also possible to enable the iPod "Shuffle songs" option directly from the top level.

Press the SCAN button to scan the currently selected tracks.

Press the INFO button to display the following:

•title
- artist
- track number and playing time.

A

A/C

See: Climate Control....98

About This Manual....7

Protecting the Environment....7

ABS

See: Brakes....136

ABS driving hints

See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes....136

ACC

See: Adaptive cruise control (ACC)......234

Accessories

See: Replacement Parts Recommendation......8

See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control......235

Active suspension....230

Principle of Operation....230

Active suspension

See: Using active suspension....230

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)......234

Principle of Operation....234

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control......235

Adaptive Headlamps....49

Cornering lamps....50

Adjusting the Headlamps....53

Adjusting the Steering Wheel....39

AFS

See: Adaptive Headlamps....49

Air Conditioning

See: Climate Control....98

Air Vents....98

Front air vents....98

Rear air vents....98

Alarm....216

Principle of Operation....216

Alternative frequencies....265

All except Sony and Sony DAB......265

Sony and Sony DAB......265

Appendices....206

Arming the alarm....218

Arming the engine immobilizer.....215

Ashtray....220

Front ashtray....220

Rear ashtray....220

At a Glance....9

Adjusting the steering wheel....13

Autolamps....14

Automatic climate control....16

Automatic main beam control....14

Automatic transmission....18

Autowipers....13

Blind spot information system (BLIS)......15

Changing the wiper blades....13

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)....17

Driver alert....19

Electric child safety locks....12

Engine idle speed after starting....16

Fuel filler door....17

Information displays....15

Instrument panel overview - left-hand drive....9

Instrument panel overview - right-hand drive....10

Keyless entry....12

Keyless starting....17

Lane departure warning....19

Manual climate control....16

Manual transmission....18

Power folding mirrors....15

Power windows....14

Rear view camera....19

Reverse mirror dipping....15

Speed limiter....19

Towing the vehicle on four wheels....20

Audible Warnings and Indicators......73

Switching the chimes on and off....73

Audio Control....39

Mode....39

Seek....40

Audio distortion reduction (CLIP)......264

All except Sony and Sony DAB......264

Sony and Sony DAB....264

Audio Input Jack....223

Audio introduction......252

Audio menu control....258

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB with Bluetooth....260

Audio System Security......256

Audio troubleshooting....273

Audio Troubleshooting......273

Audio Unit Clock and Date Displays......257

Audio unit commands....282

Auxiliary input....288

CD Changer....283

CD Player....282

External devices - iPod......290

External devices - USB....288

Radio....285

Audio unit menus....264

Audio unit operation....258

Audio unit overview 253

Auto-Dimming Mirror......66

Autolamps....46

Automatic Climate Control......101

Air distribution....102

Blower....102

Mono mode....102

Recirculated air....103

Setting the temperature....102

Switching off the automatic climate control....103

Switching the air conditioning on and off....103

To switch mono mode back on....102

To switch mono mode off....102

Windshield defrosting and demisting......103

Automatic High Beam Control......46

Activating the system....47

Manually overriding the system......47

Setting the system sensitivity....47

Automatic Transmission....133

Drive modes....134

Emergency park position release lever....134

Hints on driving with an automatic transmission....134

Selector lever positions....133

Automatic volume control......264

All except Sony and Sony DAB......264

Sony and Sony DAB......264

Auto-Start-Stop....224

Principle of Operation....224

Auxiliary Heater....104

Changing the remote control battery......107

Diesel auxiliary heater (depending on country)....108

Feedback during starting and switching off....106

Fuel operated heater (depending on country)....107

Parking heater....104

Programming the transmitter....107

Remote start in combination with direct start or timer....106

Remote starting....106

Auxiliary input jack....272

Auxiliary Power Points......220

B

Balance/fade control....258

6000CD....258

Sony and Sony DAB......258

Bass/treble control....258

6000CD....258

Sony and Sony DAB......258

Battery connection points......249

Belt Minder......213

Deactivating the safety belt minder......213

Blind Spot Information System......66

Blind spot information system (BLIS)......66

Detection errors....67

System detection and alerts......67

Turning the system on and off....67

Using the system....66

Bluetooth setup....275

Handling of phones....275

Requirements for Bluetooth connection....275

Bonnet Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Hood......169

Booster Seats....22

Booster cushion (Group 3)......23

Booster seat (Group 2)....22

Brake and Clutch Fluid Check....182

Brakes....136

Principle of Operation....136

Breaking-In....155

Brakes and clutch....155

Engine....155

Tires....155

Bulb changing

See: Changing a Bulb....54

Bulb Specification Chart......60

C

Capacities and Specifications......202

Technical Specifications....202

Cargo Nets....145

Luggage retention net....145

Car Wash

See: Cleaning the Exterior....186

Catalytic Converter....126

Driving with a catalytic converter....126

CD changer....223

Changing a Bulb....54

Approach lamp....56

Central high mounted brake lamp....58

Daytime running lamps....55

Front fog lamps....57

Headlamp....54

Interior lamps....58

License plate lamp....58

Luggage compartment lamp....60

Reading lamps....59

Rear lamps....57

Side repeater....56

Vanity mirror lamp....60

Changing a Fuse....168

Changing a Road Wheel....194

Assembling the wheel brace....196

Installing a road wheel....198

Jacking and lifting points....195

Locking lug nuts....194

Removing a road wheel....197

Removing the wheel trim....197

Vehicle jack....194

Vehicles with a temporary spare wheel....194

Changing the 12V Battery....249

Changing the remote control

battery....29

Remote Control With Folding Key Blade....30

Remote Control Without a Folding Key Blade....31

Changing the Wiper Blades......43

Rear window wiper blades....44

Windshield wiper blades....43

Checking the Wiper Blades......43

Child Safety....21

Child Safety Locks......27

Electric child safety locks....28

Manual child safety locks....27

Child Seat Positioning....23

Child Seats....21

Child restraints for different mass groups....21

Cigar Lighter....219

Cleaning the Exterior....186

Body paintwork preservation....187

Cleaning the alloy wheels....186

Cleaning the chrome trim....186

Cleaning the headlamps....186

Cleaning the rear window....186

Cleaning the Interior....187

Instrument cluster screens, LCD screens, radio screens....187

Rear windows....187

Safety belts....187

Climate Control....98

Principle of Operation....98

Climate control commands....296

Climate....296

Clock....219

Coded keys....215

Cold Weather Precautions....155

Compact disc playback....268

Compact disc changer playback......268

Compact Disc Player....267

Compact disc track compression.....269

All except Sony and Sony DAB......269

Sony and Sony DAB....269

Compact disc track scanning.....269

6000CD....269

Sony and Sony DAB....269

Connecting an external device....300

Connection....300

Connecting an external device - Vehicles With: Bluetooth....300

Connecting a Bluetooth audio device....300

Connectivity....299 General Information....299

Convenience features......219

Coolant Check See: Engine Coolant Check....181

Cruise Control....140 Principle of Operation....140

Cruise control See: Using Cruise Control....140

Cup Holders....221

D

Daytime Running Lamps......46

Diesel Particulate Filter....123 Regeneration....123

Digital signal processing (DSP)....264 Changing the DSP settings....264

DSP equalizer....264

DSP occupancy....264

Direction Indicators....50

Disabling the passenger airbag......213

Disabling the passenger airbag....214

Enabling the passenger airbag....214

Fitting the passenger airbag deactivation switch....213

Disarming the alarm....218

Vehicles with keyless entry....218

Vehicles without keyless entry....218

Disarming the engine immobilizer.....215

Dog Guard....149 Installing behind the front seats....149 Installing behind the rear seats....150

DPF See: Diesel Particulate Filter....123

Driver Alert....242 Principle of Operation....242

Driving Hints....155

Driving Through Water....155 Driving through water....155

DRL See: Daytime Running Lamps....46

E

Eco Mode....226

Principle of Operation....226

Ejecting compact discs....269 6000CD....270 Sony CD....270

Electromagnetic compatibility.....206

Ending compact disc playback......271

Engine Block Heater....123

Engine Coolant Check....181 Checking the coolant level....181 Topping up....182

Engine immobilizer....215 Principle of Operation....215

Engine Oil Check....181 Checking the oil level....181 Topping up....181

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)....180

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel/2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel....181

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)....180

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)......180

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)....180

Entering a security code....256 6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB....256

Exterior Mirrors....64 Manual folding mirrors....64

F

Fastening the safety belts......212

Fast forward/reverse....268 All except Sony and Sony DAB....268 Sony and Sony DAB....268

First Aid Kit....156

Flat Tire Inflation See: Temporary Mobility Kit......188

Floor Mats....223

Fog Lamps - Front See: Front Fog Lamps....48

Fog Lamps - Rear

See: Rear Fog Lamps....48

Forward alert function....239

Adjusting the warning sensitivity......239

Switching the system on and off....239

Front Fog Lamps....48

Fuel and Refueling....125

Technical Specifications....128

Fuel Burning Heater

See: Auxiliary Heater....104

Fuel Consumption......126

Fuel Consumption

See: Technical Specifications....128

Fuel filler door....127

Refueling with a fuel can....128

Fuel Quality - Diesel....125

Long-term storage....126

Fuel Quality - E85....125

Long-term storage....125

Fuel Quality - Gasoline....125

Fuse Box Locations....157

Central fuse box....157

Engine compartment fuse box....157

Rear fuse box - 4-door and 5-door.....157

Rear fuse box - Wagon....158

Fuses....157

Fuse Specification Chart....159

Central fuse box....163

Engine compartment fuse box....159

Rear fuse box....165

G

Gauges....69

Engine coolant temperature gauge....70

Fuel gauge....71

General Driving Points....155

General Information on Radio

Frequencies....29

Glasses Holder....223

Global Opening and Closing......37

Global closing....37

Global opening....37

Glove Box....221

Cooled glove box....221

H

Handbrake

See: Parking Brake....136

Hazard Warning Flashers....53

Headlamp adjustment

See: Adjusting the Headlamps....53

Headlamp Leveling....48

Recommended headlamp leveling switch positions....48

Headlamp Washers....42

Head Restraints....111

Adjusting the head restraint....111

Removing the head restraint....112

Heated Seats....115

Raising and Lowering the Temperature....116

Heated Windows and Mirrors......103

Heated exterior mirrors....103

Heated windows....103

Heating

See: Climate Control....98

Hill launch assist (HLA)

See: Using hill start assist....227

Hill Start Assist......227

Principle of Operation....227

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes....136

HLA

See: Hill Start Assist....227

See: Using hill start assist....227

Hood Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Hood......169

|

Ignition Switch....118

Immobilizer

See: Engine immobilizer....215

Important audio information......252

Audio unit labels....252

Disc labels....252

Incorrect security code......256

Information Displays....75

General Information....75

Information Messages....88

Active suspension....89

Airbag....89

Alarm....89

Automatic high beam control, Lane departure warning and Driver alert.....89

Battery and charging system....90

Blind spot monitor....90

Child power lock....91

Climate control....91

Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control (ACC)....91

Doors open....91

Engine immobilizer....92

Hill start assist....92

Keyless system....92

Lighting....93

Maintenance....94

Message indicator....88

Message symbols......88

Occupant protection....94

Parking brake....94

Power steering....94

Stability control (ESP)......95

Start-stop....95

Tire pressure monitoring system....96

Transmission....95

Viewing current messages....88

Voice control....97

Instrument Cluster....69

Instrument Lighting Dimmer......219

Interior Lamps....51

Courtesy lamp....51

LED Interior lighting....51

Reading lamps....51

Vanity mirror lamps....53

Introduction......7

iPod

See: Using an iPod....303

ISOFIX Anchor Points....26

Attaching a child seat with top tethers....26

Top tether anchor points....26

J

Jumper cables

See: Jump Starting the Vehicle....248

Jump starting

See: Jump Starting the Vehicle.....248

Jump Starting the Vehicle....248

To connect the booster cables....248

To start the engine....249

K

Keyless Entry....34

Disabled keys....36

General information....34

Locking and unlocking the doors with the key blade....37

Locking the vehicle....35

Passive key....35

Unlocking the vehicle....36

Keyless Starting....118

Failure to start....119

Ignition on....119

Starting a diesel engine....119

Starting with automatic transmission......119

Starting with manual transmission....119

Stopping the engine when the vehicle is moving....120

Stopping the engine with the vehicle stationary....120

Keys and Remote Controls......29

L

Lane Departure Warning......244

Principle of Operation....244

Lighting Control....45

Headlamp flasher....45

High and low beam....45

Home safe lighting....45

Lighting control positions....45

Parking lamps....45

Lighting....45

Load Carriers

See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers......147

Load Carrying....142

General Information....142

Loading compact discs....267

6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB......267

Loading the compact disc

changer......267

Load Retaining Fixtures....147

Installing the load bracket....148

Installing the load retaining fixtures......148

Locking and Unlocking....32

Automatic relocking....34

Central locking....32

Double locking....32

Double locking the doors with the key......32

Locking and unlocking confirmation......32

Locking and unlocking the doors and the luggage compartment lid with the remote control....33

Locking and unlocking the doors from inside....33

Locking and unlocking the doors with the key....32

Luggage compartment lid....34

Reprogramming the unlocking function....34

Locks....32

Lost security code....256

Luggage Anchor Points....142

4-door and 5-door....143

Wagon....142

Luggage Covers....146

Stowing the luggage cover - Wagon without full size spare wheel....147

Lug Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel....194

M

Maintenance....169

General Information....169

Technical Specifications....183

Manual Climate Control....99

Air conditioning....100

Air distribution control....99

Blower....99

Heating the interior quickly....99

Recirculated air....99

Ventilation....100

Manual Seats....112

Adjusting the angle of the seatback.....113

Adjusting the height of the driver's seat....112

Adjusting the lumbar support....112

Moving the seats backwards and forwards....112

Manual Transmission....133

Map Pockets....222

Memory Function....222

Recalling a stored seat position....222

Resetting the memory....223

Setting a memory pre-set.....222

Message Center

See: Information Displays....75

Mirrors

See: Heated Windows and Mirrors......103

See: Windows and Mirrors....62

Moonroof

See: Power moon roof....108

MP3 display options....271

CD text display options....271

MP3 file playback....270

6000CD....270

Playing a multi session disc....270

Sony and Sony DAB......270

N

Navigation system commands......296

News broadcasts....266

All except Sony and Sony DAB......266

Sony and Sony DAB......266

O

Occupant protection....210

Principle of Operation....210

Oil Check

See: Engine Oil Check....181

On/off control....258

Opening and Closing the Hood......169

Closing the hood....170

Opening the hood....169

P

Parking Aid....138

Maneuvring with the parking aid....138

Switching the parking aid on and off......138

Parking Aids....138

Principle of Operation....138

Parking Brake....136

Personalized Settings......86

Help screen, radio, navigation and phone information....86

Language....87

Navigation information....86

Units of measure....87

Power Door Locks

See: Locking and Unlocking....32

Power exterior mirrors......64

Mirror tilting positions....64

Power folding mirrors....64

Reverse mirror dipping....65

Power moon roof....108

Moonroof anti-trap protection....109

Moonroof relearning....110

Moonroof safety mode....110

Opening and closing the moonroof.....109

Opening and closing the moonroof automatically....109

Tilting the moonroof....109

Power Seats....113

2-way power seat....113

8-way power seat....114

Power Steering Fluid Check......182

Topping up....183

Power Windows....62

Anti-trap function....63

Driver's door switches....62

Front and rear passengers' door switches....62

Global opening and global closing......62

Opening and closing the windows automatically....62

Resetting the memory of the power windows....63

Safety mode....64

Safety switch for rear windows....63

Programming the remote control.....29

Programming a new remote control.....29

Reprogramming the unlocking function....29

R

Rear Fog Lamps....48

Rear Seats....115

Creating a level load floor....115

Folding the seatbacks down....115

Folding the seatbacks up....115

Rear Under Floor Storage....145

Vehicles with a sliding loadspace floor....145

Vehicles without a sliding loadspace floor....145

Rear view camera....231

Principle of Operation....231

Rear View Camera....231

Activating the rear view camera....231

Deactivating the rear view camera....233

Using the display....231

Vehicles with parking aid....233

Rear Window Wiper and Washers......42

Intermittent wipe....42

Reverse gear wipe....42

Washer....42

Refueling - E85....126

Refueling....126

Regional mode (REG)......265

All except Sony and Sony DAB......265

Sony and Sony DAB......266

Removing a Headlamp....53

Repairing Minor Paint Damage......187

Repeat compact disc tracks......270

6000CD....270

Sony and Sony DAB......270

Replacement Parts

Recommendation......8

Collision Repairs......8

Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs....8

Warranty on Replacement Parts......8

Roadside Emergencies....156

Roof Racks and Load Carriers......147

Roof rack....147

Running-In

See: Breaking-In....155

S

Safety Belt Height Adjustment......212

Safety Precautions....125

Seats......111

Security code....256

Setting the clock and date on the audio unit....257

6000CD....257

Sony and Sony DAB....257

Shuffle/random....268

6000CD....268

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB....269

Sitting in the Correct Position....111

Sliding Loadspace Floor....143

Storage compartment....144

Snow Chains

See: Using Snow Chains....192

Speed Control

See: Cruise Control....140

Speed Limiter....240

Principle of Operation....240

Stability Control....137

Principle of Operation....137

Starter Switch

See: Ignition Switch....118

Starting a Diesel Engine....122

Cold or hot engine....122

Starting a Gasoline Engine - E85......122

Starting at low ambient temperatures....122

Starting a Gasoline Engine....121

Cold or hot engine....121

Engine idle speed after starting....121

Flooded engine....121

Starting and Stopping the Engine......118

General Information....118

Station preset buttons....260

Station tuning control....262

DAB service linking....262

Manual tuning....263

Scan tuning....263

Seek tuning....262

Steering Wheel Lock....120

Vehicles with keyless starting....120

Vehicles without keyless starting....120

Steering Wheel....39

Storage compartments......221

Sun Shades....219

Switching Off the Engine....123

Vehicles with a turbocharger....123

Symbols Glossary....7

Symbols in this handbook....7

Symbols on your vehicle....7

T

Technical Specifications

See: Capacities and Specifications......202

Telephone commands....291

Create a phonebook....294

Main settings....295

Phone....291

Phone functions....292

Telephone controls......275

Remote control....275

Telephone setup....274

Bond another Bluetooth phone....275

Making a phone an active phone....274

Phonebook....274

Phonebook categories......274

Telephone....274

General Information....274

Temporary Mobility Kit......188

Checking the tire pressure....191

General information....188

Inflating the tire....189

Using the kit....188

Tire Care....192

Tire Inflation When Punctured

See: Temporary Mobility Kit......188

Tire Pressure Monitoring System......193

Checking the tire pressures....193

Setting the vehicle load....193

Tire Repair Kit

See: Temporary Mobility Kit....188

Tires

See: Wheels and Tires....188

Tow Ball....151

Driving with a trailer....153

Driving without a trailer....154

Inserting the tow ball arm....152

Maintenance....154

Removing the tow ball arm....153

Unlocking the tow ball arm mechanism....152

Towing a Trailer....151

Steep gradients....151

Trailer Lighting....151

Towing Points....246

Installing the towing eye....246

Towing eye location....246

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels....246

All vehicles....246

Vehicles with automatic transmission....247

Towing....151

Track selection......267

All except Sony and Sony DAB......267

Sony and Sony DAB....267

Traffic information control......261

Activating traffic announcements......261

Ending traffic announcements......262

Local or distant traffic....261

To adjust the preset volume......262

Traffic announcement volume......262

Transmission....133

Transmission See: Transmission....133

Trip Computer......84

Average fuel consumption......84

Average speed....84

Distance to empty....84

Odometer 84

Outside air temperature....84

Tripmeter....84

Type 1 and 2....85

Type 3....85

Type approvals....207

Certificate for United Arab Emirates......209

EU Declaration....208

FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE......207

RX-42 - declaration of conformity......207

U

Under Hood Overview - 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)....171

Under Hood Overview - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel....176

Under Hood Overview - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)....172

Under Hood Overview - 2.0L Duratec-HE (MI4)....173

Under Hood Overview - 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel....177

Under Hood Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi (MI4)....174

Under Hood Overview - 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel....179

Under Hood Overview - 2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)....175

Unloading the compact disc changer......268

USB Port......223

USB See: Using a USB device....301

Using active suspension....230

Selecting a setting....230

System malfunction......230

Using Adaptive Cruise Control......235

Automatic deactivation....238

Changing the set speed....236

Setting a speed....236

Setting the vehicle gap....237

Switching the system off....238

Switching the system on....236

Temporarily deactivating the system....238

Using an iPod....303

CD Navigation units....305

SD Navigation units....305

Sony radio....304

Using a USB device....301

CD Navigation units....302

SD Navigation units....303

Sony radio....301

Using Cruise Control....140

Canceling the set speed....140

Changing the set speed....140

Resuming the set speed....141

Setting a speed....140

Switching cruise control off....141

Switching cruise control on....140

Using driver alert....242

Resetting the system....243

Switching the system on and off....242

System display....243

System warnings....242

Using Eco mode....226

Resetting Eco mode....226

Using hill start assist....227

Activating the system....228

Deactivating the system....229

Using lane departure warning......244

Setting the steering wheel vibration level....245

Setting the system sensitivity....245

Switching the system on and off....244

System warnings....245

Using safety belts during pregnancy....213

Using Snow Chains....192

Vehicles with stability control (ESP)......192

Using Stability Control....137

Vehicles without stability control (ESP) switch....137

Vehicles with stability control (ESP) switch....137

Using start-stop....224

To re-start the engine....225

To stop the engine....224

Using the speed limiter......240

Intentionally exceeding the speed limit....240

Setting the speed limit....240

System warnings....241

Using the telephone - Vehicles With:

Navigation System......278

Changing the active phone....279

Debonding a bonded phone....280

Making a call....279

Muting the microphone....279

Receiving an incoming call....279

Receiving a second incoming call....279

Using the telephone - Vehicles Without:

Navigation System......276

Changing the active phone....278

Debonding a bonded phone....278

Debonding a bonded phone - Sony radio....278

Making a call....276

Muting the microphone....277

Receiving an incoming call....277

Receiving a second incoming call....277

Using voice control....281

Name tag....282

System operation....281

Using Winter Tires....192

V

Vehicle battery....248

Vehicle Care....186

Vehicle Identification Number......251

Vehicle Identification Plate......250

Vehicle identification....250

Vehicle recovery......246

Ventilated Seats......116

Raising and Lowering the Temperature....117

Ventilation

See: Climate Control....98

Vents

See: Air Vents....98

VIN

See: Vehicle Identification Number......251

Voice control....281

Principle of Operation....281

Index

W

Warning Lamps and Indicators......71

ABS warning lamp....71

Airbag warning lamp....71

Blind spot monitor indicator....71

Brake system lamp....71

Coolant temperature warning lamp....71

Direction indicators....72

Engine warning lamp....72

Forward alert indicator....72

Front fog lamp indicator....72

Frost warning lamp....72

Glow plug indicator....72

Headlamp indicator....72

High beam indicator....73

Ignition warning lamp....72

Lane departure warning indicator....72

Low fuel level warning lamp....73

Message indicator....73

Oil pressure warning lamp....73

Rear fog lamp indicator....73

Safety belt minder....73

Shift indicator....73

Stability control (ESP) warning lamp......73

Start-stop indicator....73

Warning Triangle....156

4-door and 5-door....156

Wagon and vehicles with tire repair kit....156

Washer Fluid Check....183

Washers

See: Cleaning the Exterior....186

See: Wipers and Washers....41

Waveband button....260

Wheel Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel......194

Wheels and Tires....188

General Information......188

Technical Specifications....199

Windows and Mirrors....62

Windshield Washers....42

Windshield Wipers......41

Intermittent wipe....41

Winter Tires

See: Using Winter Tires....192

Wipers and Washers....41

L
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
—
( x - 2x) t - xy^2 = ( x - 2x) f^ t
-
1
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated text (underscores) where none should exist. Hence, the result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
—
-
-
|
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated text (underscores) where none should exist. Hence, the result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
—
-
m = 311
|
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated text (underscores) where none should exist. Hence, the result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
(No text)
(No text)
( x - 2x) t - xy^2 = ( x - 2x) f^ t
|
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
The Ground Truth image displays a single, solid horizontal line. According to Rule 2 (UNDERSCORE & LINE RULES), this is a stylistic or background line, not a placeholder underscore. Therefore, the OCR result must ignore it. The provided OCR content is "____", which consists of four underscores. This is an incorrect interpretation of the line as a placeholder, violating the rule that stylistic lines must be ignored. The OCR has hallucinated text (underscores) where none should exist, violating the rule to ignore such lines. Hence, the OCR result is inconsistent with the Ground Truth.
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]